AN ARABIC MANUAL.
LANSING.

THE LIBRARY
UNIVERSITY
SITY OF
OF THE
REGENTS
OMNIBUS & ARTIBUS
CLASS
BOOK
492.7
L291
MIN
NESOTA

Mary
Henretia

ΑΝ
Angsley


ARABIC MANUAL
BY
J. G. LANSING, D. D.,
GARDNER A. SAGE PROFESSOR OF OLD TESTAMENT LANGUAGES AND EXEGESIS IN
THE THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY OF THE REFORMED CHURCH
AT NEW BRUNSWICK, N. J.
CHICAGO:
AMERICAN PUBLICATION SOCIETY OF HEBREW.
1886.
COPYRIGHT, 1886, BY J. G. Lansing.
492;7
4291
UFOE MON
THIS VOLUME
IS RESPECTFULLY DEDICATED
ΤΟ
AMERICAN SCHOLARS AND STUDENTS
WHO ARE ENGAGED
IN TEACHING OR STUDYING
A LANGUAGE
CALLED BY ARABIA'S ADMIRING SONS
لسان الملائكة
942224
',
PREFACE.
The need of an Elementary Arabic Grammar that should be more
complete than Elementary Grammars heretofore published, and yet not
so exhaustive in treatment as such standard works as those of Wright
and Palmer, has been variously felt and expressed. To meet to some
extent this need, this Manual has been prepared.
This need has come to be experienced largely through the recent re-
vival in Hebrew, and Shemitic studies generally. With such a revival
there has been awakened, necessarily, a great interest in the Arabic, as in
the other cognates. Various measures have operated to produce this re-
vival; prominently, the work of the Old Testament Company of Revisers,
the Schools of The Institute of Hebrew, the explorations carried on by
societies and individuals, the many valuable contributions recently made
to biblical and oriental literature, and last-though not least-the many
excellent results of missionary operations.
That the Arabic should come to occupy a most prominent position in
such a revival is evident. That the prominent position due it has not
always been universally felt and conceded is equally evident. The author
subscribes to the conviction, for many years repeatedly expressed by the
most learned Arabic scholars, the conviction still held by the most ac-
complished Arabic scholars, that, all points considered, the Arabic occu-
pies the first place as to importance in the study of the Hebrew and
Aramaic of the Bible. A few out of a number of reasons may be stated
in support of this. Space and place will not admit of proof, illustration,
or anything beyond the barest statement of a few of these reasons now
and here.
1st. The antiquity of the Arabic. This antiquity has been held by
many since the days of Schultens, to be equal, if not superior, to that of
the Hebrew, as seen, for example, in the Arabic forms appearing in the
earliest portions of the Pentateuch, such as proper names, epithets,
particles, pronouns, verbal and nominal inflections.
2d. The Shemitic affinity of the Arabic. It possesses more that is
common to all the Shemitic languages than does any other one Shemitic
language, having suffered far less-comparatively nothing-by corruption.
3d. The logical structure of the Arabic. No other language is so
logical in its structure. Grammatical forms, lexical meanings, etc., are
formed and developed logically. Something of this may be seen in the
next, or Special, Preface on the Three Short Vowels, and by consulting
such works as Palmer, Leitner, and others. The value of the Arabic in
this respect, in the study and elucidation of that family of languages to
which it belongs, cannot be overestimated.
vi
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
4th. The preserved purity of the Arabic. This is a matter not only
of historical record and fame, but necessarily follows from the logical
structure of the language. Forms and meanings being deduced accord-
ing to certain fixed laws and logical processes, became themselves fixed
and strongly fortified against change and obsoleteness. While other
languages of the same family became dead, and while many of their
forms and meanings changed or disappeared, the Arabic remained com-
paratively pure and intact, excepting perhaps the temporary corruption
which necessarily occurred during the Muslim conquests and foreign
affiliations of the first four Caliphs.
5th. The lexical richness of the Arabic. The meanings and shades
of meanings belonging to words, logically deduced, and wonderfully pre-
served, are very many. Many of these meanings, radical and derivative,
have become lost in the other languages of the same family, and must
be supplied by the Arabic. This is apparent from the most casual glance
at our Hebrew Lexicons. But even these Lexicons furnish us with a
very small amount of Arabic and of the value to be derived therefrom,
compared with what should be the case. Very frequently the Arabic
equivalent and its principal meanings are not given. Sometimes another
than the real Arabic equivalent is given, which may be found to exist
under precisely corresponding letters. Sometimes derivative instead of
radical meanings are given. Any one may satisfy himself of this by
taking a certain root (e. g., ḥaba), noting its Biblical usages, and com-
paring the Hebrew Lexicons with that magnificent work, Lane's Arabic-
English Lexicon.
6th. The grammatical value of the Arabic. Being so systematic and
thorough in treatment, it is of great importance in studying the other
cognates. Something of this is seen in the excellent Hebrew Grammars
that have been published, and in such masterly treatises as that of Driver
on The Hebrew Tenses. Other sources of great aid and importance re-
main to be worked, as, for example, the re-construction of the Hebrew
forms or conjugations upon the basis of the Arabic.
7th. The literary importance of the Arabic. The literature of this
language, compared with its cognates, compared with most languages, is
vast. This is important, as, for example, in observing grammatical con-
structions; obtaining different and accurate meanings; furnishing ap-
plied usages; interpreting poetical, symbolical and oriental forms.
8th. The living character of the Arabic. About seventy millions of
persons speak the Arabic as their vernacular, while it is read, more or
less, by about two hundred millions. The importance of the Arabic in
this respect is obvious.
These are a few of the reasons. Others will occur to the Arabic
scholar and student.
The reading selections in the Chrestomathy are in accord with what
has been said. It should be remembered, however, that these selections,
being brief, are intended to serve only as specimens or beginnings. For
further need Arabic books may be obtained at a comparatively small
expense.
!
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
vii
The Vocabulary contains all the words to be found in the reading
selections, besides a few others.
In the preparation and publication of this Manual, the author lays no
claim to originality, unless it be to some extent in the matters of arrange-
ment, statement, and the special emphasis placed upon the three short
vowels. The author is under very great obligations to the following
authorities, which he has freely consulted, and upon which this Manual
is based, viz., Wright's Arabic Grammar, Palmer's Arabic Grammar,
Lane's Arabic-English Lexicon, Butris Bustani's Arabic Grammar the
Miftah, and his Lexicon Muheet al Muheet.
For special encouragement in the prosecution of this work the thanks
of the author are due to Prof. Harper of Yale, and to his associates,-in-
structors, lecturers and students,-in the Schools of The Institute of
Hebrew.
The thanks of the author are also especially due the Rev. John W.
Payne, of Morgan Park, Ill., for the typographical skill exhibited by him
in this work, and for his knowledge of the Arabic which has been of
great help to the author in various ways.
The needs of the class-room, felt both in the Seminary, and in the
Schools of The Institute of Hebrew, having given rise to this Manual, it
is left especially with the Professors and students of the class-room to
decide upon its merits and demerits, and to furnish the author (by whom
they will be gratefully received) any corrections and suggestions. To
such and to all to whom it may come this Manual is left with many mis-
givings, with a knowledge of its imperfections, but with the hope that it
may contribute something of interest and help in the study of the Arabic.
J. G. LANSING.
Theological Seminary,
New Brunswick, N. J., Sept. 1, 1886.
SPECIAL PREFACE.
THE THREE SHORT VOWELS.
Of all languages the Arabic is the most logical in its structure. Some-
thing of this may be seen from the brief note here taken of the three
short vowels, which constitute perhaps the most important key to the
Arabic language.
Originally the three vowel-sounds were represented by the three letters
Alif, Waw, Yay, called semi-vowels or weak consonants. The natural
laws of accentuation, to a greater or less extent, gave rise to the inven-
tion and introduction of the three short vowels. These three short
vowels, thus deduced, and corresponding to the three vowel-letters, are
fatha, kesra, damma; equivalent, it may be said, to a, i, u.
Moreover, the forms of these three short vowels were deduced from
the forms of the three vowel-letters. Whereas alif is a perpendicular
stroke above the line, so fatha is placed above the letter, and is a straight
simple stroke somewhat inclined. And whereas yay is a horizontal
stroke below the line, so kesra is placed below the letter, a stroke similar
to fatha. And ḍamma, corresponding to the vowel-letter waw, is simply
that letter, in miniature, placed above the letter.
These three short vowels have different shades of pronunciation. This
is especially the case with fatha or the a vowel. These shades of pro-
nunciation are regulated by, or originate from, the character of the con-
sonant which the vowel accompanies. Thus, if the a vowel accompanies
a guttural or an emphatic consonant, it will necessarily be pronounced
broader than when it is pronounced with one of the other letters. Such
a difference in the pronunciation of the vowel must follow upon a correct
pronunciation of the guttural or emphatic consonant. Hence the impor-
tance of learning the correct pronunciation of the language orally.
A vowel-letter preceded by a homogeneous short vowel constitutes a
long vowel. It is the same vowel-sound pronounced twice in succession
and in the same breath, hence a long vowel.
Nunnation is the doubling of the short vowels at the end of a word, and
terminating the pronunciation of the vowel with the sound of n. This
doubling or adding of two short vowels indicates naturally an addition
of strength both to the sound of the vowel and the sense of the word.
The reason for this sound of n is found in the fact that it is a funda-
mental law of human speech that a vowel upon which strength or stress
is laid at the end of a word should merge or terminate in the sound of n.
The strength or emphasis given to the meaning of the word may be seen,
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
ix
for example, in the energetic moods with their strong predominance of
the n sound at the close.
These three short vowels run through the language with wonderful
controlling power, rendering the language systematic and logical to a
unique degree. Forms and meanings are reasoned out. Permanence is
thus secured to both forms and meanings. The only proper way to study
the Arabic thoroughly is to study it logically, and then it becomes an
absorbing study. But to set forth something of this, attention may be
called to a few facts, to which the investigator may add, and with which
the student should become thoroughly conversant. What follows should
be observed especially in connection with such sections as 36 and 46.
It should be borne in mind, as will appear from what follows, and from
the sections specified, that there is a meaning inherent in the vowels
themselves; that the u vowel indicates (1) simple action, (2) completed
action, (3) continuous condition; that the i vowel indicates (1) dependent
action, (2) connection of two ideas, (3) temporary condition; that the a
vowel indicates (1) related action, (2) immediate relation to action, (3)
action resulting in a certain condition. It will also be remembered that
root words are generally composed of three letters, and that the middle
letter is the most important. Now-
1) The short vowels mark the Voices. According to what has been
said, the a vowel should predominate in an active (transitive) verb. The
succession really is three a vowels, one to each letter of the root verb.
The a vowel over the last radical gives the pronominal force (8 46). The
Active Voice is indicated by the a vowels of the other two radicals, es-
pecially the a vowel of the middle and important radical. In the verb
he killed we have an action, related to an actor, and resulting in a certain
condition as to the object acted upon, and therefore the vowel of the
middle radical of such a verb must be a. In the formation of the Pas-
sive Voice there is simply a change of vowels. All three vowels are
used, and in regular logical succession. Thus, he was killed shows first
of all a simple action, therefore we place the u vowel over the first rad-
ical; it shows next that this action depended upon or proceeded from
some one, therefore we place the i vowel under the second radical; it
shows last that the action resulted in a certain condition to the object,
therefore we place the a vowel over the last radical: and so the regular
and actual succession of the vowel for the Passive Voice is u, i, a.
2) The short vowels mark a verb as Transitive or Intransitive. To be
thirsty shows a verb that is intransitive, and a condition that is tempo-
rary, therefore the vowel of the middle or important radical must be i,
which is the case. But the verb to be beautiful shows a continuous con-
dition of an intransitive verb, rather than a temporary condition, and
therefore the vowel of the middle radical must be u, which is the case.
The Arabic root Aa-li-ma, with the i vowel accompanying the second
radical, shows an active intransitive verb, in accordance with which is
the meaning to know a thing. But Aa-la-ma with the a vowel accom-
panying the second radical shows an active transitive verb, in accord-
ance with which is the meaning he marked a thing so that another knew it.
X
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
3) The short vowels determine the Moods of a verb. Thus, the Im-
perfect Indicative he does or he shall do has the u vowel over the last two
radicals, indicating action and condition continuing during a given
period. But the Imperfect Subjunctive he may do shows a result or con-
dition subordinate to, and conditional upon, a relation being sustained
toward it on the part of the actor, viz., his doing or effecting it, and
therefore the vowel of the last radical is a, while the vowel of the middle
radical remains u, expressing the simple action.
4) The short vowels effect changes in the Radical Letters of a Weak
Verb, according to the laws of euphony. A weak verb is one which has
a vowel-letter or weak consonant for one of its root-letters. If this
vowel-letter or weak consonant is preceded by a short vowel which is
heterogeneous, the short vowel changes the vowel-letter into that vowel-
letter or weak consonant which is analogous to itself. It would seem that
just the opposite of this should be the case, that the consonant would be
stronger than the vowel. But such is not the case. And the reason is
apparent; because the short vowels give the general sense of the form,
as we have seen, while the radicals only define the particular case to
which it is to be applied, and therefore the short vowels must of neces-
sity be preserved at any sacrifice to the consonant.
5) The short vowels mark the Cases of Nouns. Here likewise that
which would naturally be inferred is that which actually takes place.
For, just as in the inflection of the verb, the u vowel is the characteristic
of the Indicative mood, so in the inflection of the noun the same vowel
denotes the Nominative case; and as the a vowel is the characteristic of
the Subjunctive or subordinate mood or condition, so in the noun the
same vowel denotes the Accusative case; and as the i vowel in the verb
indicates dependent action and connection between two things or ideas,
so in the noun the same vowel denotes the Genitive or Dependent case.
6) The short vowels mark a Noun as Definite. Nunnation, or the
doubling of the short vowels, marks a noun as indefinite and emphatic.
The reasoning is evident. When the word is indefinite, and therefore pro-
nounced without any reference to any other word, a certain lengthening
and emphasis will be given to the vowel which indicates the declension;
hence nunnation and its use to represent an indefinite noun. But when
the word is in construction, or defined by the article,—that is, when it is
mentioned only in its relation to another word,—the emphasis will be
placed rather on the word itself, and the long sound of the vowel, in con-
sequence, will become shortened; hence the short vowels indicate a defi-
nite noun.
7) From the short vowels are formed the Regular Plurals. As the
plural is the extension of the meaning of the singular to a number of
individuals or objects, therefore the form of the regular plural is secured
by an extension of the vowel-terminations of the singular. Thus mumi-
Nun a believer,” sing. masc., is extended into muminúna, the regular
masc. plu.; and muminatun " a believer," sing. fem., is extended into
muminátun, the regular fem. plu.
66
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
xi
These, briefly stated, are some of the facts indicating the importance
of the three short vowels, and the logical structure of the Arabic
language. In this, and other ways, and by purely logical methods, dif-
ferent forms, and many different meanings are derived. It is a process
of reasoning with respect to which a person may satisfy himself, and
secure the greatest profit, while studying Arabic as it should be studied,
if he will take up a given root and trace the connections between the
various grammatical forms and lexical meanings. The conclusion of the
process will be,-it must be so and so, and it must have such and such
meanings. And the conclusion is correct.
New Brunswick, N. J., Sept. 1, 1886.
J. G. LANSING.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
ORTHOGRAPHY.
I. THE LETTERS.
Page
13
14
.14, 15
15
15
Sec.
1. Alphabet...
2. The Pronunciation of Letters.
3. The Forms of Letters…...
4. The Classification of Letters
5. Exercise.....
II. VOWELS.
6. The Short Vowels....
7. The Long Vowels..
8. The Diphthongs..
9. Nunnation...
10. Conjunction of Consonants and Vowels
11. Exercise.....
III. OTHER ORTHOGRAPHIC SIGNS.
12. Sukoon, or Gazma..
13. Tashdeed......
14. Hamza.
15. Wasla.
16. Madda
• ·
17.
Exercise...
18. Kinds of Syllables....
19. Syllabication……..
16
..16, 17
17
17
...
17, 18
18
19
.19, 20
..20, 21
21-23
23, 24
24
IV. SYLLABLES.
1323535
V. PAUSE.
20. The Pause...
26
VI. ACCENT.
21. The Accent…………….
22. Exercise...
27
27
23. The Article……………
ETYMOLOGY.
VII. INSEPARABLE PARTICLES.
24. The Inseparable Prepositions.
25. The Inseparable Conjunctions
26. The Inseparable Adverbs..
27. Exercise…….
.31, 32
.32, 33
33, 34
..34, 35
35
xiv
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
Sec.
28. The Personal Pronouns.
29. The Pronominal Suffixes.
30. The Reflexive Form.
VIII. PRONOUN.
31. The Demonstrative Pronouns.
32. The Relative Pronouns.
33. The Interrogative Pronouns
34.
Exercise……………..
•
IX. THE VERB.
35. The Measure of Words....
36. The Verb and the Short Vowels..
37. The Forms or Conjugations of the Triliteral Verb....
38. The Quadriliteral Verb and its Forms
39. The Voices
•
40. The States (Tenses)...
41. The Moods.
42. The Numbers, Persons and Genders..
Page
36
•
36, 37
.37, 38
.38-40
40, 41
41, 42
42
43
43-45
.45-49
· •
49, 50
.50, 51
51, 52
•
52, 53
33333
X. THE STRONG VERB; ITS INFLECTION.
43. Kinds of Verbs......
54
44. Inflection by Persons
.54-56
45. Inflection by State and Mood of the Active Voice……….
46. The Inflection and the Short Vowels...
47. Apocopation...
48. The Inflection of the Passive Voice of the Strong Verb...
49. Derived Forms of the Strong Verb…….
50. The Inflection of the Quadriliteral Verb..
57-59
.59, 60
.60, 61
61
.61-63
63
XI. THE WEAK VERB; ITS INFLECTION.
51. Kinds of Weak Verbs....
64
52. Doubled Verbs..
.65, 66
53. Hamzated Verbs..
.66, 67
54.
Assimilated Verbs
55. Hollow Verbs………..
56.
Defective Verbs...
57. Verbs Doubly Weak
68
..69-71
•
71-74
74, 75
·
58. Verbs Trebly Weak..
.75, 76
59. Remaining Verbs...
76
XII. THE NOUN.
60. Its Kinds..
61. Nouns Derived from Verbs
•
62. The Construction of Verbal and Noun Forms
63. Nouns Derived from other Nouns...
64. The Genders of Nouns…….
65. The Numbers of Nouns...
66. The Formation of Plurals…..
67. The Declension of Nouns..
68. The Cardinal Numbers..
69. The Ordinal Numbers.
70. Other Numerals.....
XIII. THE NUMERALS.
777
77-86
86, 87
87-93
93- 95
95-105
.105, 106
..106-115
116-118
118, 119
•
•
•
119, 120
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
XV
Sec.
71. Prepositions...
72. Adverbs.
73. Conjunctions.....
XIV. SEPARATE PARTICLES.
74. Interjections..
PARADIGMS.
Paradigm A. Simple Form, Strong Verb, Active Voice...
Paradigm B. Simple Form, Strong Verb, Passive Voice...
Paradigm C. Derived Forms, Strong Verb, Principal Parts.
Quadriliteral Verb, Principal Parts....
Paradigm D.
Paradigm E.
Doubled Verb, Active Voice..
Paradigm F.
Doubled Verb, Passive Voice..
Paradigm G.
Doubled Verb, Derived Forms.
•
•
Paradigm H.
Hamzated Verb, Different Forms
D
Page
121, 122
123, 124
125
126
128
129
1
130, 131
130, 131
132
133
134
134, 135
136, 137
D
.138, 139
Paradigm I. Derived Forms, Hamzated Verbs, Principal Parts.
Paradigm K. Assimilated Verb, Different Forms and Derived Forms.
Paradigm L. Hollow Verb, Different Forms and Principal Parts of Derived
Forms
Paradigm M. Hollow Verb, Medial ", Active Voice..
139
140
Paradigm N.
Hollow Verb, Medial S, Active Voice
141
Paradigm 0.
Hollow Verb, Medial
و
and S, Passive Voice
142
Paradigm P.
Defective Verb, Different Forms and Principal Parts of Derived
Forms...
143
Paradigm R. Defective Verb, Third Radical, Medial Radical Fathaed,
Active Voice.....
144
•
Paradigm S. Defective Verb, Third Radical S, Medial Radical Fathaed,
Active Voice
Paradigm T. Defective Verb, Third Radical
raed, Active Voice...
145
and S, Medial Radical Kes-
146
Paradigm U.
Paradigm V.
Defective Verb, Third Radical
Verbs Doubly Weak.
and S, Passive Voice….
147
.148, 149
Paradigm W. Trebly Weak and Other Verbs..
Paradigm X. Formation of Verbal Nouns from Weak Verbs..
CHRESTOMATHY.
150
151
PART I. ARABIC TEXT.
Genesis I., pointed..
155-157
Genesis II., pointed.
Genesis III., unpointed..
158-160
161-163
Kuran, Suras, 1, 64, 93.
164-167
PART II.
TRANSLITERATION, TRANSLATION AND ANALYSIS.
Transliteration of Genesis I. 1-19..
168
Literal Translation of Genesis I. 1-19..
169
Analysis of Genesis I. 1-5......
.170-173
Transliteration of the First Sura of the Kuran.
Analysis from the Sura entitled
entitled..
PART III. VOCABULARY.
174
...... التغابن
.174, 175
Vocabulary, arranged alphabetically
.176-194
ORTHOGRAPHY.
I. The Letters.
1. ALPHABET.
Sign.
Finals.
Name.
Equiv- Numerical
alent. Value.

Initials.
Medials.
Uncon-
Connected.
nected.
Alif
Bay
Tay
Thay
Geem
Hay
Khay
Dal
That Zal
Ray
E E C
ปปปา
Zain
Seen
Sheen
Sahd
Dhad
Tah
Zah
1. 3 J
ج
in
Ն::
1· 4 ·4 0
خ
ذ
ـذ
س
ش
ص
ــض
a
1
b
2
t
400
th
500
g
80
3
h
8
kh
600
d
4
Z
700
r
200
ـذ
ض
ط
३ ३ १ १ 44 4.५
N.
7
S
60
sh
300
AQ
02.
90
خر
d
800
9
N:
900
S ·ཆ
70
gh
1000
ė
f
80
k.
100
20
人
​30
m
40.
n
50
f
h
5
W
6
y
10
•
b:
ك كـ
ع
ع
ف
ق.
ــك
ـل
~ 3 3 3 3 4 4 NNIILO »
5:
Ain
Ghain
Fay
Kaf
Kaf
Lam
Meem
Nun
Hay
Waw
Yay
X
,
ي
A
૧
2.
14
[?? 2, 3.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
1. The Arabic language has twenty-eight letters. The letters Alif
and Lam combine, and form the letter Lam-alif, sometimes inserted
before the Yay, and counted as a twenty-ninth letter of the alphabet.
Lam-alif unconnected, and Y; connected, .
2. The letter Hay receives two dots over it when it is used as a
grammatical termination, becoming ; and, when followed by a vowel, is
pronounced like t.
3. In some cases the dots of final are always omitted; and in some
books they are uniformly omitted.
4. All the letters are consonants, and are written from right to left.
2. THE PRONUNCIATION Of Letters.
1. Under "Name," in the table, the letters are spelled as pronounced.
The "Equivalent" indicates the pronunciation or power, except in a few
instances which may be noted.
2. is sounded like th in thing.
3.
is sounded both as hard and soft g. The former is preferable.
4.
is a strongly aspirated h, without being rough.
5.
is a sound similar to that made in clearing the throat.
6.
is an emphatic s, articulated somewhat stronger than ss in hiss.
ض
7. is an aspirated d, articulated by placing the front part of the
tongue against the roof of the mouth, allowing the tip of it to touch the
upper teeth, and uttering with the d an aspirated sound.
8.
9.
10.
ع
holds the same relation to t as to d.
is with a z instead of t sound. It is a strongly aspirated.
is articulated by opening the mouth wide and making a sound as
far back in the throat as possible.
11.
ع is.غ
is preceded by a sound similar to that made in gargling.
12.is k pronounced as far back in the throat as possible.
13. 8 is the aspirated h of home.
3. THE FORMS OF LETTERS.
As there are over one hundred different shapes in which the letters
are to be seen, according as they are connected or unconnected, initial,
medial or final, it will be of aid to observe the following:
1. The feature common to
is a straight line with dots ی ن ث
differing in number and position, to distinguish the one from the other.
2. Cut off the curve from
and م ل ق ف غ ع ض ص ش س خ ح ج
there remain the initial forms of those letters.
22 4, 5.]
15
· AN ARABIC MANUAL.
3. The letters, have no letters joined after them; but they
may be joined to letters that precede.
4. A word may not be divided. When it is necessary to fill out a line,
certain letters may be given a different form, or may be extended; as,
نا ي ك . .
ناي
e. g.,
Solar Letters..
Lunar Letters...
Weak Letters
Gutturals..
·
Strong Gutturals
4. THE CLASSIFICATION OF LETTERS.
•
3
لم
ن ل ظ ط ض ص ش س زر
زرده
ك ق ف غ ع خ ح ج
ی و
ی و
ا
ه غ ع خ ح
Emphatic Consonants..
غ ع خ ح
to
1. The Solar Letters are those in which the letter Lam of the definite
Article A1 (= the) coalesces.
2. The Lunar Letters are those in which the Lam of the definite
Article does not coalesce.
3. The Weak Letters are so called because of their affinity to the
corresponding vowels, and the readiness with which they coalesce with
them, or are substituted by them.
5. EXERCISE.
نهارا قال ظلمة الارض في Spell and Classify Letters .1
كذلك
حسن
لیلا فصل صباح
2. Write the Arabic of these Equivalents.-Wgh, yrf, kan, wst, tḥt, algld,
faml, alsmwat, alty, bzr, ltgtma, wltzhr.
II. Vowels.
6. THE SHORT VOWELS.
Before the introduction of vowel signs the weak letters (2 4) were used
to indicate the vowel sounds, and hence were called vowel-letters. The
following are the three short vowels corresponding to the three vowel-
letters:
1. called Fatha, written above the letter, corresponding to I, a,
pronounced as a in hat.¹
2. — called Kesra, written below the letter, corresponding to S, = i,
pronounced as i in bit.2
3. 2 called Damma, written above the letter, corresponding to
pronounced as u in bush.3
و
u,
4. When preceded or followed by the strong gutturals (? 4), the em-
phatic consonants (? 4), or, fatha is pronounced as a in father,
kesra as i in kill, damma as o in note.4
5. Between the two different and general pronunciations belonging to
each of the vowels as given above there are other shades of pronunciation
fluctuating from hard to soft, according as the leading consonant is hard
or soft.
عَملَ
Examples.—1. ↓ 2. ↓é 3. juuit 4. été solbe Sims
عِظَامِي خَلَقَ
عُشْبَ
N. B.--See Special Preface on The Three Short Vowels in Arabic.
7. THE LONG VOWELS.
The following are the three long vowels, originally represented by the
three vowel-letters (22 6, 4):
1.; that is, alif preceded by the homogeneous short vowel fatḥa,
2. ; that is, ya y preceded by the homogeneous short vowel kesra,
1.2
ی
3.,; that is, waw preceded by the homogeneous short vowel dam-
ma,
ū.3
4. The weak or vowel letters, preceded respectively by their homo-
geneous short vowels, are called letters of prolongation.
4
22 8, 9, 10.]
17
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
5. Fatḥa is sometimes written perpendicularly over a letter, when it
indicates the omission of an alif, and is to be pronounced long.4
سنين 2. قَالَ 1 - .Examples
> >
3.
روح
ذلك 4.
8. THE DIPHTHONGS.
1. There are two diphthongs formed by fatha followed by a vowelless
or
ي
2.9 =
the diphthong au, pronounced as ow in now.1
3. the diphthong ai, pronounced as ai in vain.2
= -ي
Examples.-1.
يوم
2.
بين
9. NUNNATION.
1. When the signs of the short vowels are doubled, they are pronounced
with the addition of the sound n. This is called Nunnation or Ten-
ween.
2. Tenween Fatha, written, pronounced an.¹
Tenween Kesra, written, pronounced in.2
Tenween Dam ma, written or or 22, pronounced un.3
3. Nunnation takes place only at the end of a word.
4. Tenween fatha takes an after all the consonants excepting
when the final consonant is 8,4 or when the tenween precedes
5 (ẻ 10.
2), and sometimes when it accompanies a hamza ( 14). This does not
曲
​affect the quantity of the vowel, which is always short.
5. As the tenween is the adding or doubling of two short vowels,
so it likewise adds strength to the word. The tenween, therefore,
expresses emphasis. It also expresses indefiniteness. See Special Pref-
ace on The Three Short Vowels in Arabic.
وَاحِدًا
Examples.—1. fálý 2.
ثَمَرٍ
3.
S
5.
فَنَّى . خَرِبَةً
10. CONJUNCTION OF CONSONANTS AND VOWELS.
1. The consonant is pronounced before the vowel.
2.
at the end of a word, preceded by fatha, is pronounced like an
abbreviated alif, which is likewise its name. In such a case the two
dots of the ≤ are generally omitted.¹
3. After at the end of a word, when preceded by damma or fatḥa,
,
a superfluous alif is oftentimes written, especially in the plural of verbs,
to guard against the possibility of this final, being separated from the
18
[% 11.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
$
body of the word to which it belongs, and mistaken for the conjunction
5(= and). This is called the guarding alif.2.
4. A pronominal suffix added to a word ending in ´, the
generally changed into 1.3
ی
is
=) صَلوةٌ
5., is pronounced as alif in the words (= life), ¾μló
prayer), and 8,5; (= alms) when these words are in the singular and
stand by themselves. Otherwise, is generally written instead of
though not always.
زكوة
و
6. The weak letters (? 4) become quiescent when preceded by a homo-
geneous vowel, that is, one related to them in pronunciation, the vowel
thus being lengthened.4 After a vowel not so related, they form a diph-
thong.5 The diphthong is frequently avoided by the weak letter being
replaced by another related in sound to the vowel preceding.6
3.
stoy for
107
رماه 3
تَسَلَّطُوا 2.
for نَارْ نور for
6.
مونا .
عَلَى 1 - .Examples.
مكان ..
مَكَانٍ
4.
1.1. EXERCISE.
رميه
from
رمى
خَالِيَةً بِحَارًا وَدَعَا لِيَكُن وَكَانت Spell and Pronounce .1
S ,
في نور
حيوة فَوْقَ طَيْرٌ فِي
تِينِ وَصَى
aaaa
i a in
а u
un
2. Write in Arabic.-Wfșl, tkwn, myah, waly, hyth, ṣbaḥ,
ua an
i a a
au a
ian u aii
i
traba, lyry, whw, khalka, şwrth, khyr.
:
#
!
III. Other Orthographic Signs.
12. SUKOON, OR GAZMA.
1. The sign of sukoon, i. e., rest, is a small circle placed over a letter.1
2. A letter unaccompanied by a vowel is called a quiescent letter, and
receives sukoon.
3. Sukoon is written over the final consonant of all shut syllables, and
serves, when another syllable follows, to separate the two.2
4. and
,
when forming a diphthong with fatḥa, take sukoon.³
ي
مِنْ لِتَفْصِلَ . لَمْلاً 3 لتَفْصل
Examples.-1.
13. TASHDEED.
1. A consonant to be doubled, without the interposition of a vowel, is
written only once, but then has placed over it the sign of reduplication
~, called tashdeed, or strengthening. It strengthens the sound and
oftentimes the meaning of a word.
W
1
2. All consonants may be doubled, and take the tash deed; and no
consonant may be doubled and take the tashdeed, only as a vowel pre-
cedes and follows it.2
3. A consonant may be repeated in writing, and not receive the tash-
deed, only when a vowel interposes between the first and second occur-
rence of the consonant.3
4. The tashdeed is necessary or euphonic. The necessary tashdeed
always follows a long or short vowel, and affects the meaning of a word.4
5. The euphonic tashdeed always follows a vowelless consonant which,
though written, is passed over in pronunciation, and assimilated to the
consonant following. The uses of euphonic tashdeed are as follows:
UI
a. When a solar letter is preceded by the definite article jƒ (= the),
the is not pronounced, and the solar letter following is doubled by
tashdeed and pronounced with the vowel preceding the J5
b. When the preposition J (= to) precedes the article, and the
article precedes a solar letter, the J of the article is assimilated, the
solar letter receives ta sh deed, and the of the article falls out.6
> , oftentimes receive the ta shdeed when
following with sukoon, or the nunnation, the n sound in both cases
falling out.7
c. The letters
ل
ي و
$
20
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
[ 14.
ن
d. The of the words
E
إِنْ أَنَّ عَنْ مِنْ
when these words are combined with
is generally not written
the receiving com-
pensation by the doubling of the letter following it.8
Examples.-1.2.
ن
بِسَبَبِكَ 3 فَيَتَسَلَّطُونَ . قَدَمَ 4. to go = ) قدم
before), (= to bring before). 5. (= As-sa-ma-wa-
☺hd
bil (= lin-na-za-ri). 7.
قدم
دم
لِلنَّظَر ..
.(katabum mubinun = كَتَابٌ مُّبِينٌ .etc عَمَّا مِمَّن ...
8.
ti). 6.
hi).
( = مِن رَّبِّهِ -mir-rabbi = من
14. HAMZA.
(?
1. When alif is not merely a letter of prolongation (8 7. 4), but a
consonant, it is distinguished by the sign, called Hamza, or com-
pression. Alif with hamza is pronounced like h in hour.
2. Hamza is written between the alif and the vowel accompanying
it.1 In the case of hamza with kesra or its tenween, sometimes
the hamza is written above the letter, and kesra below; sometimes
both are written above the letter, with the kesra between the hamza
and its letter, to distinguish it from hamza with fatha; and sometimes
both below the letter, with the hamza between the letter and the
kesra-which is the more common position.2
•
•
3. Hamza accompanies the vowel of alif when alif begins a syl-
lable.³ When alif is a radical, hamza is sometimes found written over
it without a vowel. It is also a sign of inflection prefixed to verbs.4
ह
4. Hamza written fully stands It is called alif hamzatun;
sometimes alif disjunctive. When alif hamzatun occurs in the mid-
dle of a word, introducing or following a damma or kesra, the alif,
which serves as its support, is changed into the vowel-letter correspond-
ing to the short vowel, which letter then receives the hamza. When S
thus takes the place of alif hamzatun, its two dots are generally
omitted, in order to distinguish it from the of prolongation (8 7. 4).5
5. Hamza alone is written instead of
Always,
ئ ؤ
a. At the end of a word, after a letter of prolongation; 6
b. After a final consonant with sukoon;7
ی
c. In the middle of a word, after an alif of prolongation, provided
the hamza has fatha.8
•
8 15.1
الله
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
Frequently,
:
9 ; of prolongation ی and و d. In the middle of words, after
e. After a consonant with sukoon;10
f. After kesra and damma, before
ی and
و
ي
6. A hamza may be changed into pure, or
of prolongation.11
a. When preceded by damma or kesra, and followed by long or
short fatha; 12
篊
​b. When preceded by long damma or kesra, or the diphthong ai.13
7. If the hamza has sukoon, it may be changed into the consonant
that is homogeneous with the preceding vowel, and must be so changed if
the preceding consonant is an alif with hamza.14
8. When conjunctive alif (? 15), at the beginning of a word, receives
its own vowel, the hamza is sometimes omitted, and only the vowel
written.15
E
•
for
8.
11.
4 كَأَجْنَاسِهَا 3 إلى 20 أنفه 1-.Examples رؤوس 8 أكثرَ ، كَأَجْنَاسِهَا
7.
في البدء ..
مَسَاءُ 6. مساء جات for جنت and
GE
9.
and
راوس
1 يَسْأَلُ for يَسْلُ 10 مَقْرُوون for مَقْرُوه 8 يَتَسَاءَلُونَ
G
13.
نَبِيِي for نَبِيٌّ .
سوال for سُوال 12. خَاطِئِينَ for خَاطِينَ
E
الْمَن for آمَنَ or أَمَنَ 14. الْحَمْدُ لله 15.
نَبِيٌّ from
15. WASLA.
1. The rule for the formation of the word, and for the addition of its
vowel points, would, in many words, bring together two consonants at the
beginning of a word. But according to the Arabic, two consonants to-
gether at the beginning of a word, without a vowel, are not pronounceable.
Therefore, in order to facilitate the utterance of the first, the orthographic
sign called Waşla, i. e., union, is employed.
2. The sign of Waşla is written. It is placed over alif at the
beginning of a word, to indicate that this letter is to be elided in pronun-
ciation, and the one following it to be pronounced with the last vowel of
the preceding word. This alif is, therefore, called alif conjunctive.1
3. The elision takes place-
a. With the of the article J
With the
م
E
1
and of the Imperatives of the first form of regular
verbs.2
22
[? 15.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
c. With the of the Perfect active, Imperative, and yerbal noun, of
the seventh and following forms of the verb, and with the of the Perfect
I
passive in the same forms.3
اة
d. With the nouns
إِمْرَوْ إِثْنَتَانِ إِثْنَانِ إِسْتُ إِسْمْ إِبْنَةً إِبْنْ
of, and with the noun
sometimes after the prepositions
after the asseverative particle J and
من and
4. s may not be written at the beginning of a sentence instead of 1; but
to indicate that such an is alif conjunctive, the hamza is omitted,
and only its accompanying vowel expressed.
5. Alif conjunctive may be preceded either by a short vowel, a long
vowel, a diphthong, or a consonant with sukoon.
a. A short vowel absorbs alif conjunctive with its vowel.1
b. A long vowel is shortened in pronunciation. In the case of the
suffixes of the 1st pers. sg., and, they either may be thus short-
ened, or they may assume before the article the older forms, the
receiving fatha.
c. A diphthong is resolved into two simple vowels.5
ي
d. A consonant with sukoon either takes its original vowel, if it
had one; or assumes the vowel belonging to the alif conjunctive; or
adopts kesra, as coming nearest to the sukoon because of its being
the lightest of the three vowels. Therefore, the pronouns of the 2d and
3d pers. pl. m., and (= you and they), the pronominal suffixes of
(= you, your, accus.) and (=their, them), the
0905
انتم
هم
8
6
7
9
the same pronouns,
verbal termination of the 2d pl. m. Perf., and the preposition since,
take damma, in which they originally ended. The Imperative of verbs
whose second and third radicals are alike,10 and the preposition when
preceding the article, take fatha.11 All other words ending in a conso-
nant with sukoon take kesra; i. e., nouns having the tenween,12 the
pronoun, verbal forms having no vowel on the final consonant,
13 and
particles, with the exceptions above stated.14
6. At the beginning of a sentence, alif conjunctive is pronounced with
UE
90€
fatḥa, in the article and in the word; with damma, in the
Imperative of the first form of verbs of which the Imperfect is of the
form ; with kesra, in all other cases.
7. Waşla is omitted-
الله
سم
a. In the introductory formula xin
pus for sur
for
بِاسْم الله
{
? 16.]
23
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
1
b. In the word
(=son), in a genealogical series; that is, when
the name of the son precedes, and that of his father follows in the geni-
tive; provided that the series, as a whole, constitutes part either of the
subject or predicate of a sentence. If, however, stands at the begin-
ning of a line, waşla is retained
S
c. In the article J when it is preceded by the preposition J (= to);15
and if the first letter of the noun be J, then the J of the article is also
omitted.16 Also, when the article is preceded by the affirmative particle
J 17
d. In nouns, verbs, and the article when preceded by the inter-
rogative particle 18 The alif of the article may be retained.
118
2.
3.
ن
wag-hil-mi-a-hi = ) وَجْهِ الْمِيَاهِ 1 - .Examples وَاكْثُرُوا 2 .
فَاسْتَرَاحَ الْبَدْءِ 4. .(fil-bad - i = ) في البدء .. فِي عَيْنَى الْمَلِكِ ...
فِي عَيْنَى الْمَلك for هُمُ الْكَاذِبُونَ and أَنْتُمُ الْكَاذِبُونَ ..
7.
9. is
مُنْ
8
6.
مد . رَأَيْتُمُ الرَّجُلَ : فَبَدَّدَهُمُ الرَّبُّ and إلَيْكُمُ الجَمِيعَ
11.
حَرْقِيَال 12 مِنَ الْأَرْضِ ..
فَقَالَتِ الْمَرْأَةُ 13.
أَ
10.
contracted for
(haz-ki-ya-lunī-'n-na-bi-yu).
بَل الله 14. لالنَّظَر for لِلنَّظَر 15. لللَّيْلَة for للَّيْلَة 16.
أنَّ حَذْتُمْ for أَنَّ حَذْتُمْ 18 لالْحَقُّ for للحق 12 لالليلة for لاَللَّيْلَةِ لَلْحَقِّ 17.
16. MADDA.
1. The sign Madda (= lengthening) is written thus ~
2. When alif with hamza and a simple vowel or tenween is pre-
ceded by an alif of prolongation (? 7. 4), the former alif is dropped,
its hamza retained, and the alif of prolongation receives madda over
it. It is therefore called lengthened alif, and marks the omission of
another alif.
•
3. At the beginning of a syllable or word, an alif with hamza and
fatha followed by an alif of prolongation, or by an alif with hamza
and sukoon, the two alifs are generally represented by a single alif
with madda.2 In such a case, the hamza and vowel are not usually
written along with madda. Therefore,
24
[ 17.
i
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
4. Madda oftentimes has also the value of hamza.
5. Long alif, at the beginning of a word, is sometimes written with
hamza and a perpendicular fatha, instead of with madda.
6. ,
and as letters of prolongation sometimes receive madda, when
followed by alif hamzatun (? 14. 4), only the hamza being written;
and sometimes, in poetry, over the final vowels of some pronominal forms
and the verbal termination
,,
ثُمُ
·
3.
يَسُوء 3 أَأَمَنَّا for آمَنَّا ..
2.
سَمَامَ for سَمَاء 1 - .Examples
17. EXERCISE.
1. Read, indicating the names and uses of the orthographic signs:-
G
وَأَنبَتَ جِئْتُ الْإِلَهُ فَأَخْرَجَتِ النُّورَ عَظِيمَيْنِ
مساء
نَسْلاً آخَرَ لِلَّيْلَةِ فِي الْبَدْءِ
2. Write the following in Arabic, where the orthographic sign is represented
usia
u ti js has i
a w ta ti
by the initial letter of its name:Gndha, ki, llakl, walshr,
a ws u
wasm,
i a
wshas i
ma a
a i ta in i ta a i a s i ta hi a
aly, adm.
mn-alard, shhyt-llnzr, shrky, aly,
i
IV. Syllables.
18. KINDS OF SYLLABLES.
1. Syllables are of two kinds,-Open and Closed.
2. An open syllable is one that terminates in a vowel sound. The
vowel may be short¹ or long.2
3. A closed syllable is one composed of two consonants, with sukoon
over the closing consonant.³
4. The diphthongs are closed syllables.4
5. When the second of two consonants has tashdeed, a closed syllable
is formed.5
) وَجَبَلَ 1 - .Examples
فَوْقَ
a a a a
(=w-g
w-g-b-1).
4. (fau-ka).
a
2. Jɩ (=k-å-1).
قَالَ
5. (an-na - hu).
19. SYLLABICATION.
1. Syllables must begin with a consonant.
a
3. Å
قَد
2. A syllable may not begin with two consonants the first of which is
destitute of a vowel.
3. A syllable may not end in two consonants, which are not either sep-
arated or followed by a vowel, except in pause,
4. In the syllable the consonant is pronounced before the vowel.
}
1
V. Pause.
20. THE PAUSE.
1. Final short vowels, and their tenweens, except tenween fatḥa, are
omitted in pronunciation at the end of a sentence,—that is, in pause.¹ In
poetry, however, the vowel is retained as long.
2. The accusative termination is generally pronounced in pause as the
long vowel [2
3. The termination or in the Energetic of verbs, and in the
likewise, in pause, changed in pronunciation to
إِذَنْ
particle for f, is
the long vowel [;³ while
4. Nouns ending in
simple fatha.4
ی
in the plural of the Energetic becomes
or
Ĺ
ون
drop the tenween in pause, becoming
5. Nouns ending in tenween kesra drop the tenween in pause, and then
may or may not resume the third radical which has been dropped out.5
In nouns derived from verbs third radical
resumed in the accusative and vocative.6
و
the
or S,
ي
is always
6. In the pause, 8 with or without tenween becomes 8 in pronunciation.7
7. Verbal forms whose first and third radicals have disappeared,8 and
indeclinable words ending in a vowel,⁹ add a final 8 in the pause.
8. The pause is variously indicated, by the sense, by verse divisions,
by signs such as asterisks, or points similar to our period, differing in size
according to the degree of the pause.10
لَيْلاً. 2 وَكَانَ كَذلِكَ. 1 - .Examples
5. •¸d‍ź (= kad) or
(al-gan-nah).
for* 10.
اضْرِبَن.
3.
يَاقَاضِي . 6.
6.
قَاضِي.
قد
وَقَى
4.
VOC.
7.
فَنَّى.
الجنة
8.. for Imperative of 9.
9...
7
VI. Accent.
21. THE ACCENT,
1. Words of two syllables have the accent on the penult,¹ except in
certain pausal forms where the short vowel or its tenween is omitted in
pronunciation, and also excepting monosyllables in combination with
JJ and 33 In the case of these exceptions the accent is on
وَ لَ لَ
the ultima.
2
2. The penult has the accent when it is long by nature,—that is, when
it is an open syllable containing a long vowel.4
3. The penult has the accent when it is a shut syllable, and conse-
quently long by position.5
4. When the penult is short, the accent falls upon the antepenult,
provided the word has not more than three syllables. In case the word
has more than three syllables, the antepenult receives the accent only
when it is long by nature or position.7
5. In all other cases, the accent is thrown back as far as possible.8
6. In words joined by waşla (? 15. 2), the connecting vowel (that is, the
last vowel of the preceding word) is accented.9
7. Prefixed monosyllabic particles like and do not receive or affect
the accent.10
.(ar-di = ) أَرض .1- .Examples
) وَأَوْقَات
وَأَوقَات
a-la). 4.
2. .J (=ya-kul).
3. 51(=
(=wa-aw-ka'-tin). 5. †½(=wa-kul-lu). .
6. Célo (= khu´-li-kat).
8. (= sha´-ga-ra-ti).
شَجَرَةِ
ta-ma-aul-mi-ya-hi).
7.
9.
?
.(mal-aur-na-tun = ) مَلْعُونَةٌ .
-Wa-mag ) وَمُجْتَمَعُ الْمِيَاهِ ..
فَطَرَدَ
10. 5,5 (=fa-ta´-ra-da).
22. EXERCISE.
Read the following (Gen. 2:20), indicating vowels, signs, syllables, pause
and accent:
فَدَعَا آدَمُ بِأَسْمَاءِ جَمِيعَ الْبَهَائِمِ وَطُيُورَ السَّمَاءِ وَجَمِيعَ حَيَوَانَاتِ
البَريَّةِ وَأَمَّا لِنَفْسِهِ فَلَمْ يَجِدْ مُعِينًا نَظِيرَهُ.
ETYMOLOGY.
VII. Inseparable Particles.
23. THE ARTICLE.
E
1. The Arabic has one Article, definite and indeclinable, jƒ (= the).¹
3
4
آل
2. The Article is used with nouns, to specify, the individual; 2 the
species; the object superlative; and also with certain proper names,5
as well also to convert epithets into proper names.6
3. The noun is made definite, without the Article, by suffixes,7 or by a
noun following in the genitive case.8
4. The Article is also prefixed to the adjective following the noun
which it qualifies.9 If the noun has a suffix, the Article is prefixed only
to the adjective following. 10
5. The Article is regarded as a relative when prefixed to the Passive
Participle,11 to certain nominal forms,12 and in some rare cases to a verb
in the Imperfect.
6. When a verb is sometimes put in apposition with the agent and the
Article, the Article becomes used as a conjunctive.
7. The J of the Article is passed over in pronunciation when it pre-
cedes any one of the solar letters.13 The of the Article is dropped when
preceded by the prefixed preposition 14
دل
8. The word to which the Article is prefixed does not admit of tenween.
Examples.—1. ~J (= the heavens).
السَّمَوَات
مان
2. (= the teacher in
الْمُعَلّم
question). 3. (= the man, the species mankind).
P
¿¿Ï† (= the city, i. e., of Muhammad).
{
أَلْمَدِينَة
idol Ashtaroth).. 6.
الْحَرِيرِي
5.
4.
the = ) أَلْعَشتَاروت ...
(= Al Hariri-the poet,-lit. the
trader in or manufacturer of silk). 7.
الشَّجَرَةِ
8.
ثَمَرُ 8
.(my sin = ) ذَنْبِي ..
أَلْتُورَيْنِ الْعَظِيمَيْنِ ..
(— the fruit of the tree, Gen. 3:3).
9.
(= the two great lights, lit. the two lights the great). 10.
عهدِي
Jokiƒ (= my perfect covenant, lit. my covenant the perfect). 11.
32
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
[8 24.
.(the slayer and the slain = ) أَلْقَاتِلُ وَالْمَقْتُولُ أَحْسَنُ الْقَلْبَ 2.
•
the =) النَّهَار .
13.
day). 14. (= to the woman).
(= the good of heart = the one who is, etc.).
8
Eu
لِلمَرأ
The InseparaBLE PREPOSITIONS.
24.
1. The Inseparable Prepositions are those united in writing with the
following noun, as distinguished from the separable, which are written as
separate words.
2. The Inseparable Prepositions consist of one consonant with its vowel.
They take the following noun in the dependent case. They are five in
number, as follows:
α.
(= in, at, near, with, by, through).¹ After
the 3d pers. pronominal suffixes is changed into kesra.2
used as signifying,-
4
the damma of
is variously
(1) Contact³ and companionship. This gives a transitive sense
to a neuter verb.5
(2) Instrumentality; the means by which, or the reason why a
thing is done.6
(3) Correspondence.7
(4) Sufficiency.8
(5) To show the relation between subject and predicate, especially
in negative propositions.9
(6) In the construction of many verbs, to show the relation be-
tween the act and its object.10
(7) After 15 (= behold) it indicates the object of attention.11
(8) It is a particle of swearing.12
b. ☺ (= by) is a particle of swearing.¹
13
C.
J
to. It also means for, because, on account of, at). Before
the pronominal suffixes, the kesra of the J changes into fatha,14 except in
the suffix of the 1st pers. sg., in which case the suffix absorbs the vowel of
the preposition.15 is variously used, as follows:-
(1) Its principal uses and meanings are those of the dative case.16
(2) To indicate the purpose for which, and the reason why, any
thing is done.17
(3) To indicate the object in reference to which something is said.18
· d. § (= by) is a particle of swearing.19
!
J
? 25.]
33
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
e. Í (= like, as)20 is commonly classified as a preposition, but is
really an undeveloped noun which occurs only as the governing word in
the genitive connection. When is prefixed to 15 it means thus; and
when prefixed to it becomes a comparative adverb.
م
عَن
من
ƒ. To the above may be added Ɛ and for (= of) and (=
from), when connected, for example, with the interrogative pronoun
the being dropped.21
بِجَمِيعِ أَرْضِ
(= in or through the whole land of). 2.
Examples.-1.
(= with or in him or it).
3.
جَلَسَ
بها
Jul (= he sat beside or by him).
he set out with his household). 5. (=he went)
سَارَ بِأَهْلِهِ 4 ذَهَبَ ) ..( =
and
.(he carried it away =) ذَهَبَ
6.
1 (= كَتَبْتُ بِالْقَلَمِ
for a denar).
sold the garment = ) بِعْتُ التَّوْبَ بِدِينَارٍ
wrote with the pen). 7.
-God is a sufficient oit = كَفَى بِاللّهِ شَهِيدًا .
ness).
9.
لَسْتُ
بِعَالِمِ
W
= I do not know).
10.
) قَامَ بِالْحَقِّ
he upheld the truth).
11.
إِذَا بِرَجُلٍ
I
بِاللّهِ
لى
(= like-after-its kind).
12. xL (=by God).
(=by God).
15. (to me).
♣= 131 (= behold the
13. xL (=by God).
16. (= to the Lord).
(= to rule the day, Gen. 1:16).
(=
he said in = ) قَالَ لِمَنْ يُقْتَلُ .
.(by God = ) والله .19 جنسه 20.
لِلرَّبِ
ممَّا and عَمَّا ...
regard to those who are slain).
man in question).
لَ
14, J (= to him).
17.
لِحُكْمِ النَّهَارِ
25. THE INSEPARABLE CONJUNCTIONS.
1. The Inseparable Conjunctions are distinguished from the separable
in being connected with the word following. They are three in number,
as follows:-
a.
5(and) connects words and clauses as a simple co-ordinative.¹
(= and, and so, consequently, therefore, thereupon, for). It is
used between words and clauses to indicate a consequence of what has
b.
34
[ 26.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
{
gone before. Such consequence may have reference to the consecution of
time; or it may be to show the relation between cause and effect.2 In
conditional sentences it serves to separate the apodosis from the protasis.
C. This is called the Lam of Command. It is usually prefixed to
the 3d sg. of the Jussive, to give it an imperative sense. When preceded
by or the kesra of this J is usually dropped. This is also used as
9
that which governs the verb in the Subjunctive mood of the Imperfect
state or tense, when it means that, so that, in order that. In this latter
usage it becomes identical with the preposition as indicating the pur-
pose for which, or the reason why a thing is done († 24. 2. c. (2)).
between
.(behen the light and the darlines = ) بَيْنَ النُّورِ وَالظُّلْمَةِ 1 - .Examples
,and God said, Let light be = ) وَقَالَ اللَّهُ لِيَكُنَّ نُورٌ فَكَانَ نُورٌ
2.
and light was). 3. 1 (= and let fowl fly). The sukoon
above and the kesra below the lam indicate that either form may be
used, though the kesra is usually dropped, as above, and the lam pro-
nounced with sukoon.
26. THE INSEPARABLE ADVERBS.
1. The Inseparable Adverbs are prefixed to words following, and thus
distinguished from other kinds of adverbs. They are three in number, as
follows:-
E
a., interrogative, an adverbial particle of questioning.1
b., prefixed to the Imperfect of the verb to express real futurity.2
It is an abbreviation of w
C.
M
إن
سَوْفَ
J, affirmative (= certainly, surely). The force of J is additionally
increased when is placed before the person or thing respecting which
something is affirmed.3 In a conditional sentence introduced by J (= iƒ)
Í (= if not), it answers to the antecedent. It is also used as the
complement of an oath. J is also put for when help is called for.
The of the article is dropped when J precedes it.5
or
لَوْلَا
↑
Examples.—1. 3
kill).
~~,† (= am I a keeper?). 2. j (= he shall
) أَحَارس
سَيَقْتُلُ
3. KWA 5! (= verily, thy Lord will judge). 4.
? 27.]
35
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
if it had not been for = لَوْلَا تَعْمَةُ اللهِ مَعْكُمْ لَاتَّبَعْتُمُ الشَّرِيرَ
the grace of God with you, certainly ye would have followed the evil).
.(certainly the truth = للحق .
5.
27. EXERCISE.
الله
Heavens = سَمَوَات
1. Vocabulary; memorize.—
As = He created.
خَلَقَ
في
عَلَى
بَيْنَ
Earth.
=
Light.
= Darkness.
Day.
ارض
.He said = قَالَ
نور
= He was.
He = كَانَ
ظُلبَة
She was = كَانَت
يوم
= He called.
2. Translate into English.
دَعَا
God in the
middle of a
sentence.
= in.
= upon.
= between.
وَدَعَا اللهُ لِلظُّلْمَةِ خَلَقَ اللهُ الْأَرْضَ
وَكَانَ اللهُ عَلَى السَّمَوَاتِ بَيْنَ الظُّلْمَةِ وَبَيْنَ النُّور
قَالَ
الله اليوم
3. Translate into Arabic.—God created (= he created God) the heavens.
God called to the day. The earth she was in the darkness. He was
in the light. Between the heavens and the earth. God he was in
the light and in the darkness.
VIII. Pronouns.
28. THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
1. The Personal Pronouns are of two kinds, separate and affixed.
2. The separate Personal Pronouns, used only to express the Nomina-
tive case, are as follows:-
Singular.
أَنَا
I
Dual.
1 c.
2 m.
i
thou 2 c.
أَنْتُهَا 20.
f.
أنت .
thou
he
c.
هما 30.
3 m.
3 f.
هي
she
3. When and
هُوَ
Go
(?
Plural.
10. Sú
2 m.
نَحْنُ
أَنْتُمْ
انتن
we
ye two
ye
ŵ 201
2 f.
ye
they two 3 m.
هم
they
3 f.
13
هن
they
are preceded by the conjunctions and ´ (? 25),
H
F
or by the affirmative J ( 26), or by the interrogative (8 26), the vowel
of the 8 may either be dropped or retained, as, e. 8., or, etc.
E
وَهُوَ
4. In poetry both syllables of are regarded as short, except in pause.
29. THE PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES.
1. The affixed Personal Pronouns, or Pronominal Suffixes, used only to
express the oblique cases, are as follows:-
1 c.
2 m.
2 f.
3 m.
3 f.
Singular.
يي
my, me
J
thy, thee
ك
thy, thee
୪
ها
Dual.
your, you too كما
كُمَا 2.
his, him 3 c. their, them two
her
1 c.
2 m.
2 f.
3 m.
Plural.
,our نَا
كم
3
هم
هن
Us
your, you
your, you
their, them
3f. their, them
? 30.]
37
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
2. These Pronominal Suffixes appended to the verb express the accusa-
tive. The only difference in the case of the verb is that of the 1st
pers. com. sg. is changed to 1 The thus introduced is called the
guarding nun, because it serves to prevent the final vowels of the verb
from being absorbed by the long vowel, which actually takes place
with the noun.
3. These Pronominal Suffixes also, when appended to the noun, serve to
express the genitive.
4. The ḍamma of the suffixes is changed after,
into kesra.2
حي
and
5. After a long vowel with the suffixes,
becomes
3
6. With the suffix
a final
or coalesces into
4
ری
,
ی
ی
7. The feminine termination
suffix.5
8
becomes
before the pronominal
8. When waşla follows the plural masculine pronoun, the meem is
pointed with damma.6
9. The Pronominal Suffix serves to make the noun definite, and there-
fore the tenween disappears. See Special Preface on The Three Short
Vowels in Arabic.
2.
; (his booke = ) كَتَابِهِ 2 طَرَدْتَنِي he will come = ) يَأْتِيهِ ; his book = ) كَتَابِهِ .
طَرَدْتَنِي 1-.Examples
(= (=
to him). 3.
(= sins), ¿LLE♫ (= my sins). 4.
صَارِبُويَ
becomes (= my strikers); and (= upon) becomes
cyló
= upon me).
¿¿lé
.(her writing = ) كَتَابَتُهَا (oriting = ) كَتَابَةٌ .
عَلَيْهِمُ السَّلَامُ
6.
30. THE REFLEXIVE FORM.
The Arabic has no distinct pronominal form to express the reflexive.
Two or three different methods are in use to express the reflexive
meaning.
1. The reflexive meaning is expressed when the pronominal suffixes
are appended to a substantive in the accusative governed by a verb,¹ or to
one in the genitive governed by a preposition annexed to a verb.2
38
[? 31.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
2. A suffix attached to the verb itself, or to the preposition annexed to
the verb, cannot have a reflexive meaning; but to give it this reflexive
meaning there must be interposed the word (= soul =
self) or
(= spirit) or £15 (= substance) or
عين
(= eye
(= state).3
essence) or
رح
$
نفس
حال
3. The only exception to rule 2 is in the case of those verbs which
signify an act that takes place in the mind, when the pronominal suffix
is the first object, and the second object is either a noun or an entire
sentence.4
Examples.-1.
0I
¿
(= he has spent his (own) money or property).
2. (= they said to their (own) brothers).
قَالُوا لِإِخْوَانِهِمْ
, (= he struck himself).
himself smitten).
3.
ضَرَبَ 3.
he imagined =) خَالَهُ مُصَابًا 4.
31. THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
1. The Demonstrative Pronouns are either simple or compound.
2. The simple Demonstrative Pronoun is 5 (= this, that). It is
declined as follows:-
Nom.
Gen.
and
Ac.
Singular.
Dual.
Masc. Fem. Masc.
Fem.
ذَانِ
ذي
ذَا
ذَيْنِ
أُولَى تَانِ
تَيْنِ
Plural.
Com.
or
أولاء
3. The simple is used to indicate a person or thing near the speaker.
4. 3 is seldom used by itself. When it forms a compound, the fem. sg.
assumes the form →
تي
or at the end, and or at the beginning.
¿¿
5. The damma in the com. pl. is always short, being merely a full
form of writing. In 1, the fem. of
و
(= first), the u is long.
6. Related to 3 is the demonstrative, indicating possessorship. It
is declined as follows:-
8 31:]
39
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
Singular.
Masc. Fem.
Masc.
Dual.
Fem.
Masc.
Plural.
Fem.
(أُولَاتُ) ذَوَاتُ أُولُوا ذَرُو
ذَوَانَا
ذَوَا
ذَاتُ ذُو .Nom
(أُولَاتِ) ذَوَاتِ أُولِي) ذَوِي
ذَات
{
ذَوَاتَى ذَوَى
ذَاتَ
ذَا
Gen. Su
Ac.
7. In the plural, the forms in parentheses are the same in signification
as the regular forms; the difference between the two sets of forms being
that the forms in parentheses are only used as prefixed nouns, and have
ace are = نَحْنُ أُولُو قُوَّةِ
(
نَحْنُ أُولُو قُوَّة . . : no singular of their own proper letters
possessors of strength).
e.
8.,
we
8. From the simple Demonstrative Pronoun is formed a compound
Demonstrative Pronoun, by adding the pronominal suffixes of the 2d
pers. (229). This compound Demonstrative Pronoun indicates distant
objects (that). It is declined as follows:-
Singular.
Masc.
Fem.
Dual.
Masc.
Fem.
Plural.
Com.
ذَائِكَ تبك تَاكَ ذَاكَ .Nom أُولَاكَ and أُولَآئِكَ تَانِكَ
Gen.
and
Ac.
دينك
تَيْنكَ
9. More usually the demonstrative syllable is inserted before the
pronominal suffix, in which case the is written defectively in the singu-
lar, while in the dual the two liquids and coalesce into thus:-
Singular.
Dual.
Fem. Masc.
Fem.
Masc.
W
Plural.
Com.
Nom.
Gen. )
and
Ac.
تِلْكَ ذلِكَ
ذَاتِكَ تِلْكَ
دَيْنٌكَ
أُولَالِكَ تَانّكَ
and
أُولَائِكَ
10. The Demonstrative Pronoun for near objects is ordinarily a com
pound formed by prefixing the particle of attention (= lo! here) to
the simple demonstrative 3 The of the particle is written defectively,
-:this. It is declined as follows = ) هذا whence
Nom.
Gen.
and
Ac.
Plural.
Com.
Singular.
Masc.
Dual.
Fem.
Masc.
Fem.
هذا هذَان هذِهِ هؤلاء and هَاؤلاء هتَانِ
هتين
هُدَيْنِ
40
[? 32.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
11. For the sake of additional emphasis may be added to the above,
هَاتِيكَ هذاك whence
هانيك
Ásta etc. The I, however, is not generally added to
the dual or plural.
ذُو 12 .
masc. and ☺ſó fem., and a few other words, aslo (=com-
صَاحِبٌ
panion) and ~| (= father), etc., are used to express the possessive form.
32. THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
الَّذِي
1. The Relative Pronoun for who, which, that is It is com-
pounded of the article I, the demonstrative J and the demonstrative
pronoun (or, It is declined as follows:—
Singular.
Masc.
Fem.
Masc.
Dual.
Plural.
Fem.
Masc.
Fem.
أَللَّاتِي
الّذِينَ
or
or
اللَّوَانِي الْأُلَى
الَّذِي .Nom اللَّتَانِ اللَّذَانِ
اللَّذَانِ الَّتِي
اللَّتَيْن اللَّدَيْن
Gen.
and
Ac.
WE
أَلَّذِينَ and
الَّتِي الَّذِي The forms . .
2.
are written defectively, on
and
اللَّتِي اللَّذِي account of their frequent occurrence, instead of
اللَّذِينَ
The other forms retain the double J of the article and
demonstrative.
3. The other Relative Pronouns are
(who) rarely declined (? 33),
من
.what), indeclinable. These are properly interrogative pronouns =) ما and
}
4. and Lo are substantives, and are never used, like s, in a
merely adjectival sense.
WI
5. When used substantively,
has the same meaning as
Lo, viz., he who, that which, whoever, whatever; but when
is used
and من
ألَّذِي
is used for def-
أَلَّذِي
adjectively, it means who, which, that, and refers to a definite substantive,
with which it agrees in gender, number and case.
? 33.]
'41
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
inite antecedents. (= who?) and (= what?) are used to refer to
ما من
an indefinite antecedent.
33. THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
1. The Interrogative Pronouns are st and
2.
3.
أي مَنْ
(=what? which thing?) is used of things, and is indeclinable.
(= who? which?) is used of persons, and is rarely declined. It
has the distinction of gender, number and case only when it stands alone.
When in such a case it is declined, its declension is as follows:-
Plural.
Singular.
Dual.
Masc.
Fem.
Masc.
Fem.
Masc.
Fem.
Nom.
Gen.
Ac.
مَنَات
مَنُون
مَنْتَان
مَنَان
منه
مَنُو
منه
مَنَانٌ
{
مَنِي
مَنِين مَنْتَيْن
منير
مَنَا
منه
4. In interrogation the demonstrative pronoun 5 is oftentimes added
to the interrogatives
.(? what is that = مَا ذَا
(5
and, whence (= who is that?) and
من
مَنْ
5. and are always masc. sg. unless specifically defined to the
contrary, or to avoid ambiguity. The pronoun referring to and to
must agree in gender and number with the thing for which they stand.
(= who? which? what?) is declined like a regular noun,
اي
6. fem.
thus:-
GE
اية
Nom.
Gen.
Ac.
Singular.
Masc.
Dual.
Plural.
Fem.
Masc.
Fem.
Masc.
Fem.
أَيَّانِ
اية
أي
회
​?
أيْيْن؟
اية
اية
14
14.
اي
أَيًا
9: 3 Yi
113
أَيَّاتٌ
أَيُّونَ أَيْتَانِ
أَيَّاتٍ
آيين
ايتين
7.
is either construed with a following noun in the genitive, or with
a suffix, or stands alone. In the first two cases it drops the tenween, and
has no dual or plural.
When standing alone, it has all the numbers and
cases.
42
[? 34.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
63
8. when it follows an indefinite noun, agrees with it; when it fol-
lows a definite, it is put in the accusative.
أَيُّ .9
ما
may be compounded with the interrogatives and giving
ن
the sense of -soever, as (= whosoever), (=whatsoever) and fem.
دو
كم
ايما
Only the first part of this compound is declinable.
10. (= how much?) is used both in an interrogative and exclamatory
sense.
; thus
It is strictly a preposition compounded with the interrogative
foror (= the like of what?).
ما
11. Similarly, the interrogative
is in other cases shortened to
prepositions to which it is united; as
عم
لم
after
مِنْ مَا for and فِيمَ لِمَ بِم مم
for In such cases the accent is drawn back from
preceding syllable.
1. Vocabulary.-
34. EXERCISE.
to the
= He saw.
He = رأى
رای
حسن
Good.
خرَجَ
He went forth.
.He divided = فَصَلَ .Place = مکان .Morning = صَبَاح
.One = واحد
Evening.
مَسَاء
= Let be (m.).
= Let be (f.).
= He appeared.
Soul = نَفس .under = تخت
= anto.
= إِلَى
وَكَانَتِ الْأَرْضُ تَحْتَ .
5.
8.
7.
He made.
عَملَ
كَذلك
لِيَكُن
لتكن
ظَهَرَ
2. Translate into English.—1. № 5,
وَكَانَ
6.
.
مَنْ أَنْتَ 4 ظَهَرَ اللَّهُ عَلَى الْأَرْضَ وَلِنَفْسِكَ السَّمَاءِ 3
وَلِتَظْهَرِ الْأَرْضُ خَرَجَ إِلَى مَكَانٍ وَاحِدٍ
وَقَالَ لَهْوَ .
الَّتِي تَحْتَ السَّمَاءِ
وَقَالَ
3. Translate into Arabic.-1. He made the morning. 2. Let (f.) appear
the earth under the heavens. 3. He went forth unto one place. 4.
God created thy soul. 5. God saw the good light, and called it day.
6. Who is he who went forth upon the heavens? 7. God said, this
day, to thy soul. 8. What is that ? 9. He who appeared to us.
IX. The Verb.
35. THE MEASURES OF WORDS.
1. Roots are triliteral¹ or quadriliteral.2 The great majority are tri-
literal.
2. The 3d sg. m. perf., being the simplest form of the verb, is taken
as the root of the verb. In translation, however, we express it by the
Infinitive.
3. Modifications of the meaning of the root are obtained by prefixes,
affixes, and by the insertion of letters in the root.3
4. The word which signifies mere action, is taken as the typical
root for exhibiting these modifications, and the forms thus obtained are
called the measures of words. For example, the insertion of an between
the first and second radical, and pointing the second radical with kesra,
gives the sense of the agent or active Participle; thus becomes
Î≤ls (= one who does); and this word is the measure upon which all
فَاعل
other agents of this kind are formed.4
S
Examples.-1.
2.
and subdue ye = وَأَخضعوها ..
E
3.
خرج
her-it). 4. (= writing = a scribe).
36. THE VERB AND THE SHORT VOWELS.
1. Of the three radical letters which belong to the simple triliteral
verb, the second is the most important. Of the three vowels which
accompany the three radical letters of the simple triliteral verb, that
belonging to the second radical is the most important.
2. The three radical letters of the simple triliteral verb, when standing
alone, may appear in four different ways, with their respective significa-
The important distinguishing فعل and فَعَلَ فَعلَ فَعَلَ .tions, viz
feature here is more especially the vowel of the second radical.
3. The following tabular view is given as obtaining in general. In this
tabular view only some of the primary facts, showing the great import-
ance of the three short vowels, are given, and the logical relation of those
44
[? 36.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
J
facts indicated. Other associated facts relative to the nature and import-
ance of the three short vowels will appear in their appropriate places.
Perfect familiarity with the following tabular view and the remarks.
accompanying will be of greatest help.
indicates
Simple Action.
Completed Action.
Continuous Condition.
indicates
On 1st rad., Pass.
On 2d rad., Neut. Nom. case.
or Intransitive.
Dependent Action.
On 2d rad., Neut.
Connection of Two Ideas.
or Intransitive.
Gen. or
Depend'nt
case.
Temporary Condition.
indicates
Related Action.
Immediate Relation to Action.
Action Resulting in a certain Condition.
On 2d rad., Act. Ac. case.
4. Js (= it was done), the Perf. pass. of the verb
فُعلَ
(= to do)
shows the regular succession of the vowels, as above, and their significa-
tions; thus, expresses an action, depending upon or proceeding
from some one, resulting in a certain condition; it was done.
حَسُنَ
5. Jums
means to be beautiful. The damma on the second radical
shows a continuous condition, and indicates that it is neuter or intransi-
tive, describing a natural or inherent quality, in accordance with which is
to be beautiful.
6. Jibs
means to be thirsty. The kesra under the second radical
indicates temporary condition, and that it is neuter or intransitive, in
agreement with which is the meaning to be thirsty.
7.JP
حَزَنَ
means to sadden. The fatha on the second radical indicates
the active, the action resulting in a certain condition to another (ac.).
But, with kesra under the second radical, indicates temporary con-
dition, and that it is neuter or intransitive, therefore to be sad.
8. The
means to inhabit;
means to grow old; and
عمر
means to
be in a flourishing state. Therefore, some verbs have different forms, and
may take two or all three of the short vowels on the middle radical of the
Perfect, with a corresponding difference of meaning, that difference in
meaning coinciding in general with the force of the three short vowels as
indicated in the tabular view.
? 37.]
45
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
9. True, there are many active verbs, at least such as we would call
active, that have kesra under their second radical. However, the tabular
view furnishes the general rule, and serves to show the important signifi-
cations and distinctions which exist in the very nature and application of
the three short vowels, or vowel sounds.
N. B.-See Special Preface on The Three Short Vowels in Arabic.
37. THE FORMS OR CONJUGATIONS OF THE TRILITERAL VERB.
1. From the first or ground form of the triliteral and quadriliteral verbs
are derived other forms expressing various modifications of the idea con-
tained in the ground form.
2. The derived forms or conjugations of the triliteral verb number
fifteen. The last three, however, are of very rare occurrence.
fifteen forms are as follows:-
Jest
Mies!
The
(4th) أَفْعَلَ (7th) إِنْفَعَلَ (10th) إِسْتَفْعَلَ (13th) إِنْعَولَ (1st) فَعَلَ (4th) أَفْعَلَ
(5th) تَفَعَلَ (8th) إِنْتَعَلَ (11th) إِفْعَال (14th) إِنْعَمْلَلَ (24) فَعَلَ
(6th) تَفَاعَلَ (9th) إِفْعَل (12th) إِفْعَوْعَل (15th) إِفْعَلَى
فَعَلَ
1st Form, Ješ
Jélő (3d)
1. The first or ground form is generally transitive or intransitive in
signification, according to the vowel of the second radical.
2. In most of the transitive and some of the intransitive verbs the
vowel of the second radical is fatha. The vowel kesra in the same
position has generally an intransitive signification; damma invariably so.
The kesra indicates a temporary state, or accidental quality; the damma
a permanent state, or inherent quality (2 36. 3, 5-8).
2d Form, é
فَعلَ
1. The second form is formed from the first by doubling the second
radical.
2. This form adds intensity to the signification expressed by the first.
form. This intensity is intensive or extensive. It implies that an act is
done with great violence, or for a long time, or to or by a number of
individuals, or repeatedly.¹
1
3. From the intensive comes a causative signification. Verbs intransi-
tive in the first form become transitive in the second.2 Verbs transitive in
the first form become doubly transitive, or causative, in the second.3
4. The second form is also declarative, estimative, denominative and
descriptive.
46
[? 37.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
3d Form, Jélé
فَاعَلَ
1. The third form is formed from the first by the insertion of an alif
between the first and second radicals, or, more strictly, by lengthening
the short vowel of the first radical into the corresponding long vowel.
2. This form expresses the effort or attempt to perform upon the object
that act which immediately affects an object denoted by the first form;
whence the idea of reciprocity is implied when the effort is mutual.4
3. When the first form requires a preposition (indirect object) to express
the relation between the act denoted by the first form and an object, this
form converts that indirect object into the direct object of the act (accu-
sative). Reciprocity is to some extent implied also here.5
4. When the first form denotes a quality or state this form indicates
the employment of that quality by one to affect another therewith.6
5. This form is sometimes used to express simple action, and sometimes
to express repetition.
E
4th Form,
أَفْعَلَ
1. This form prefixes to the root; and consequently the first radical
loses its vowel.
2. In signification this form is causative. It converts the intransitive
verb of the first form into a transitive; and the transitive verb of the first
form into a doubly transitive or causative.7
3. The most usual significations of this form are,-transitive or causa-
tive; going to, or making for, a place; exposing or displaying; turning
into; being or becoming at a certain time.
4. Occasionally a transitive verb becomes intransitive in this form.
5. The difference between the causative significations common to both
the second and fourth forms appears to be that, in the former, it is
derived; in the latter, original.
6. Like the second, the fourth form is also sometimes declarative or
estimative.
5th Form,
s
تَفَعّلَ
1. This form is formed from the second by prefixing the syllable
2. In signification this form is reflexive or sequential of the second
form. It expresses the state into which the object of the action denoted
by the second form is brought by that action, as its effect, result or con-
sequence. In translation it must frequently be rendered by the passive.8
3. From the reflexive comes a second, and the more usual, signification,
viz., the effective. It differs from the passive in that the passive indi-
cates that a person is the object of the action of another; whereas the
% 37.]
47
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
effective implies that an act is done, or a thing is experienced, or a state
is produced in a person, whether it be caused by another or by himself.9
تَفَاعَلَ
6th Form, clés
1. This form is formed from the third by prefixing the syllable
2. In signification this form is reflexive and sequential of the third
form. It expresses the state into which the object of the action denoted
by the third form is brought by that action, as its effect, result or
consequence, 10
3. Therefore, the idea of possible reciprocity in the third form becomes
a necessary reciprocity in this form. But the reciprocal action of this
form necessarily limits the idea of reciprocity to one of the two persons
concerned. Thus, if it is said of one J he fought, the other party to
such reciprocal action will become fought against; whence it is
apparent that the former will have an active sense, while the latter will
be passive, but passive only as it is consequent upon the former.
7th Form, Lee!
1. This form is formed from the first by prefixing a before which is
added a prosthetic alif, to facilitate pronunciation.
2. In signification this form is reflexive, middle or passive. It expresses
the state or condition resulting from the action of the simple triliteral verb.
3. The reflexive pronoun contained in this form is never the indirect
object to which may be added another direct object, but always the direct
object itself. Moreover, this form never assumes the reciprocal significa-
tion. These two points distinguish the seventh form from the eighth;
while it thus approaches more nearly a passive.11
4. Occasionally this form is permissive, denoting that a person permits
an act to be done, or an effect to be produced upon him.
8th Form,
افْتَعَلَ
1. This form is formed from the first by inserting the syllable
between the first and second radicals; consequently the first radical
loses its vowel, when it becomes necessary to prefix prosthetic alif.
2. In signification this form is reflexive or middle of the first. While
the seventh form expresses the state or condition consequent upon the
action, this eighth form expresses the idea of being in a state affected by
the action.12
3. From the idea of "being in a state of," this form obtains a reflexive
meaning. The reflexive object is either the direct object or accusative,
or the indirect object or dative.
48
[? 37.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
4. From the reflexive comes a reciprocal signification, which this form
has in common with the sixth.13
5. Sometimes the reflexive signification passes into the passive, espe-
cially in verbs destitute of the seventh form.14
9th Form, Lis!
1. This form is formed from the first by doubling the third radical.
The third radical being doubled draws the accent upon the penult, in
consequence of which the first radical, being more rapidly pronounced,
loses its vowel, and therefore requires prosthetic alif.
2. In signification this form is descriptive of inherent qualities, and as
such qualities cling firmly to persons and things, therefore the intensive-
ness expressed by reduplication.15
10th Form, Jef
To
1. This form is formed from the first by prefixing the letters
these prefixed letters is prefixed prosthetic alif, according to rule, ? 19. 2.
2. This form converts the causative signification of the fourth form
into the reflexive or middle.16
3. This form is oftentimes denominative, in which cases it unites the
causative and reflexive significations.17
4. This form is used to indicate that a person regards the quality ex-
pressed by the first form as referring to himself, or for his benefit. It
also expresses the ideas of seeking, desiring, asking, demanding, taking.
11th Form, Jes!
1. This form is formed from the first by lengthening the fatha of the
second syllable.
2. In signification this form is the same as the ninth, except that it
seems to express a higher degree of quality than the ninth form.18
Remaining Forms.
1. The 12th and 13th Forms Je, and J express great
intensity.19
إِفْعَوْعَلَ
2. The 14th and 15th Forms are very rare, and may be regarded as
varieties of the quadriliteral verb.
= كَلَمَ 1 - .Examples
= to speak,
كَلَّمَ
= to talk with.
to be = فَدَسَ .
2.
holy, was
=
to sanctify. 3. — = to write,
= to teach to
write.
قَتَلَهُ 4.
= he killed him, XE
he tried to kill him, or
2 38.]
49
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
5. = he wrote to him, x = he corre-.
حَسُنَ . حَاسَنَهُ ,to be good, kind =
أجلس to sit down = جلس . جَلَسَ
أجْلَسَ
fought with him.
sponded with him.
treated him kindly.
to sit down.
8.
to be broken in pieces.
9.
= to become learned.
10.
كَسَرَ
= he
= to bid one
= to break, to break in pieces,=
yams
= to teach, s
= to throw
علم to know =
عَلِمَ ..
ترامی ,to throw down =
رمى
= تَرَامَى
he = تَقَاتَلَ ,he fought = قَاتَلَ ,he killed = قَتَلَ oneself down; and
was one of the parties engaged in a fight between two. 11.
= كَسَرَ
إِنَّكَسَرَ
to breale,
اجتمع collect
إِجْتَمَعَ
to be broken, or it was broken. 12.
= to be in a collected state.
جمع
خَصم ..
= to
= to dispute,
14.
نَصَرَ
.they disputed one with another = إِخْتَصَمُوا or تَخَاصَمُوا
to be victorious.
15.
= to give
= to be helped (of God)
انتصر to help = إِنتَصَرَ
إِبْيَضٌ
= to be white.
oneself up.
أَسْلَمَ 6. - إستسلم ,to give up = إِسْتَسْلَ
to make oneself master or possessor of a = استولى 17.
إِسْتَوْلَى
= to be pure ohite. 19. = to be rough,
خَشنَ
= إِبْيَاضٌ 18 .thing
إخشوشن
= to be very rough.
38. THE QUADRILITERAL VERB AND ITS FORMS.
Quadriliteral Verbs are formed in the following manner:—
1. A biliteral root which expresses a certain sound or movement is
repeated, to indicate the repetition of that sound or movement.¹
2. A fourth letter is prefixed or affixed to, or inserted in the middle of
a triliteral verbal form. The fourth letter is commonly a liquid or
sibilant.2
3. Quadriliteral Verbs are also denominatives formed from nouns of
more than three letters.3 Some of these are foreign words.
4. Quadriliterals are also sometimes combinations of the most promi-
nent syllables or letters in certain common formulas.4
50
[? 39.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
فَعْلَلَ
5, The Quadriliteral Verb is of the measure It has only three
derived forms or conjugations, and those are of rare occurrence.
1st Form,
فَعْلَلَ
This form corresponds in formation and conjugation to the second form
of the triliterals. It is both transitive and intransitive in signification.5
تَفَعْلَلَ ,d Form
2d
This form agrees in formation and signification with the fifth form of
the triliteral verb.6
3d Form, Mi
This form corresponds to the seventh form of the triliteral, except that
the characteristic is not prefixed, but inserted between the second and
third radicals.7
4th Form,
إِفْعَلَ
This form corresponds to the ninth form of the triliteral. It is in-
transitive, and expresses an extensively or intensively high degree of an
intransitive act, state, or quality,8
Examples.-1.
= to whisper.
2. Jesú
= to be scattered
وسوس
تَلْهَذَ 3.
شمع
4.
=
to become a pupil, from s = a disciple.
5.
تخرج
.in the name of God = بِسْمِ اللهِ for بَسْمَلَ .
إحْرَنجم
roll. 6.
= to roll along.
massed together.
8.
تَدَحرج
- إِدْلَهَمْ
=
= to
7. it (a crowd)
to be very dark.
39. THE VOICES.
1. There are two Voices,-the Active and the Passive.
2. Arab grammarians define the Active and Passive Voices respectively
as the "known" and the "unknown," in the former case the agent being
known, and in the latter case the agent being unknown.
3. All the forms of the verb have these two Voices, excepting intrans-
itive verbs of the form and of the ninth and eleventh and fifteenth
forms inclusive, as also those verbs of the forms
and which
denote not a transitive or an intransitive act, but a state or condition.
4. The difference between the Passive Voice and the fifth, seventh and
eighth forms of the verb is that, in the former case, the idea is that of
8 40.]
51
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
being a purely passive, while, in the latter case, the idea is that of some-
thing effective or sequential.
5. The subject of an Active Voice is always an agent whose act may
affect an object or not. The subject of the Passive Voice is either the
object of the former or the abstract idea of the act.
6. Verbs expressing a state, condition or act confined to the person of
the subject are called Neuter Verbs, as being strictly neither active nor
passive. By Arab grammarians they are designated as "verbs that are
confined to the subject," as distinguished from transitive and intransitive
verbs.
40. THE STATES (TENSES).
1. There are two States or Tenses, the Perfect and the Imperfect.
2. The Perfect State denotes a completed act; one that is done and
completed in relation to other acts.
3. The time at which the act expressed by the Perfect took place is left
indeterminate, unless defined by the context or by some particle.
4. The Perfect, therefore, is used to denote—
a. An act completed at some past time.
b. An act completed at the moment the speaker is describing it.
c. An act the character or effect of which still remains in a state of
completion.
d. A past act which is constantly or frequently recurring.
e. An act the occurrence of which is so certain that it may be regarded
as having already taken place.
f. The act of a hypothetical sentence, expressing a foregone con-
clusion
g. The act of supplicatory or imprecatory sentences.
h. The act denoted by the Perfect may be associated with the Perfect
of the verb 5 (= to be) or preceded by the particle
when it has the force of the Pluperfect.
(= already),
5. The Imperfect State denotes an unfinished act; one that is about to
commence, or that is in progress.
6. In respect to time, the Imperfect, like the Perfect, is to some extent
indeterminate until defined by the context or by particles.
7. The Imperfect, therefore, is used to denote—
a. An act of duration, i. e., one which does not take place at a par-
ticular time to the exclusion of any other time.
b. An act commenced at the moment of speaking, but not yet com-
pleted.
52
[? 41.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
1
c. An act which is to take place hereafter. The futurity of the act
is made absolute and more distinct by prefixing
of Jan (8 26. 1. U).
سون
the abbreviated form
d. An act future with respect to the past time of which a person is
speaking.
e. An act which continues during the past time.
f. The Future and Future-perfect are sometimes expressed by pre-
fixing the verb and its Imperfect
to a verb, the former to a
يكون ان
يكون
verb in the Imperfect, the latter to a verb in the Perfect.
8. The Perfect is generally regarded as taking the meaning of the
Imperfect, as follows:-
اذا
a. After fót (=when, as often as). The future act is thus represented
as having already taken place.
إن
b. After (if) and other particles or words implying a condi-
tional meaning. In such a case the condition is represented as already
fulfilled.
c. After the particle (as long as, whilst, as often as).
41. THE MOODS.
1. There are five Moods,-the Indicative, Subjunctive, Jussive, Imper-
ative and Energetic.
2. The Indicative Mood is used in all direct narration.
€
3. The Subjunctive Mood occurs only in subordinate clauses, and indi-
cates an act dependent upon one previously mentioned, and future to it
in point of time. The Subjunctive is governed by the conjunction
(= that), and other conjunctions allied in meaning with In all other
subordinate clauses the Indicative Mood is used.
E
ان
4. The Jussive Mood is connected with the Imperative both in form
and signification, and implies a command or order. The particle is
generally prefixed, to give still greater emphasis. After the particle
(= not) it expresses a prohibition or wish.
5. Similar to the Jussive, the Energetic Mood is used in command,
prohibition, affirmation, interrogation. For increased emphasis the par-
ticlé Ú (= truly, surely) is usually prefixed to it.
J
6. The Imperative Mood is the same as in other languages. As no
negative particle can be placed before the Imperative, the Jussive must
therefore be used in uttering a prohibition.
7. The Indicative Mood is common to the Perfect and Imperfect States.
The Subjunctive and Jussive Moods are restricted to the Imperfect. The
€ 42.]
53
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
Imperative is expressed by a special form. The Energetic can be derived
both from the Imperfect and Imperative.
8. Instead of the Infinitive, nouns are used expressing the action or
quality.
9. Instead of Participles there are two verbal adjectives used, the one
denoting the Agent (= Active Participle) and the other denoting the
Patient (= Passive Participle).
42. THE NUMBERS, PERSONS AND GENDERS.
1. To the verb belong three Numbers,-the Singular, Dual and Plural.
2. To the verb belong three Persons, the First, Second and Third.
3. To the verb belong two Genders,-the Masculine and Feminine.
The Genders are not distinguished from one another in the 1st sg., 2d du.
and 1st pl.
X. The Strong Verb; its Inflection.
43. KINDS OF VERBS.
1. Verbs are of two kinds,-Strong and Weak.
2. Strong verbs are those whose radical letters suffer no change, and
are not rejected in any of the inflections.1
3. Weak verbs are those of which the second and third radicals are
alike,2 or which contain one or more of the weak letters (? 4), which
letters, on account of their weakness, are subject to transformation or
rejection.3
Examples.-1.
مَدَدَ for مَدَّ 2. وَعَدَ 3.
44. INFLECTION BY PERSONS.
1. The numbers, persons and genders of the verb are expressed by
means of personal pronouns annexed to the various moods and states (or
tenses).
2. The inseparable personal pronouns appear as prefixed or affixed.
The affixed pronouns are partly verbal, partly nominal affixes. The
verbal affixes express partly the nominative, partly the accusative. Pro-
nouns expressing the nominative to the verb are also in part prefixes.
3. The following are the affixed pronouns expressing the nominative.
The forms within brackets are those of the Imperfect and Imperative;
the other forms are those of the Perfect.
Masc.
3 p.
(= thou)
2 p.
1 p.
Masc.
Singular.
Com.
& (= 1)
3p. |=|=|=](= they two)
2 p.
1 p.
Dual.
Com.
Fem.
w= (= she)
~ [~~7, (57] (= thou)
=]
-ا-ان
ان اتما
(='ye two)
Fem.
[3= [¿|=, |=] (= they two)
% 44.]
_55
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
Plural.
Masc.
3p. 1,² [~,², 1, 21(= they)
2 p. 3 [~,, 1,2] (= ye)
1 p.
Com.
Fem.
(= they)
5345] (= ye)
Li (= we)
4. The prefixed pronouns expressing the nominative, and restricted to
the Imperfect, are as follows:-
Masc.
3 p.
S (= he)
2 p.
1 p.
3 p.
2 p.
1 p.
Masc.
) ي
(= they two)
Singular.
Com.
(= thou)
↑ (= 1)
Dual.
Com.
›(= ye two)
Fem.
☺(= she)
Fem.
☺ (= they two)
Masc.
3 p.
Plural.
Com.
(they = ) ي
•
Fem.
2 p.
1 p.
(= ye)
(ve = ) ن
1
5. Of the two fathas with which the first and third radicals of a verb
are always pronounced, the former is rejected after prefixed pronouns,¹
the latter before affixed pronouns beginning with a consonant.2 When
the affix begins with a vowel, that vowel takes the place of the fatha.3
6. When the third radical is it coalesces with in some of the
within
affixes, only one being written, the union being indicated by tashdeed.4
7. When the third radical is it unites with the of the affixes into
a single with tashdeed.5
8. The verbal affixes expressing the accusative are given in ? 29. 1, the
only difference being that of the 1st sg. com. is changed to
9. The ḍamma of the accusative affixes
୪
هُمَا
is changed
after
and
into kesra.7
56
[ε 44.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
10. The accusative affixes occasion the following changes in the verb:-
a. Superfluous at the end is rejected.
b. The final consonant of the 2d masc. pl. perf. retains long damma.
The same occurs with the accus. affix of the 2d masc. pl. when followed
by another affix.
c. The 2d and 3d masc. pl. Impf. sometimes reject before the
affixes and . The same occurs with the 2d fem. sg.
d. The short vowel kesra, in the termination of the 2d fem. sg. perf.,
is sometimes lengthened before the affixes to the corresponding long
vowel.
11. A verbal form may take two affixes, provided they do not indicate
one and the same person. These two affixes may both be appended to
the verb, the first person preceding that of the second, the second that of
the third.
12. The pronominal object is sometimes expressed not by the accusa-
tive affixes, but by genitive affixes attached to the word which word
never occurs alone.
13. The genitive affixes which are thus attached to the word are
given in ? 29. 1, 3, the only difference being that of the 1st sg. is
changed into because all nouns ending intake that form.9
14. The affixes compounded with
إِيَّا
ی
are used as follows:-
a. Frequently when two affixes would otherwise have to be appended
to the same verb.10
b. When, for the sake of emphasis, the pronoun is placed before the
verb.11
c. Where an affixed pronoun would immediately follow the pronom-
inal termination of a verb, both referring to the same person.12
•
يَقْتُلُ 1-- .Examples. قَتَلتَ 2. قَتَلُوا 3.
4. and 2d sg.
ثبَتَ آمَنْنَا for آمَنَّا . أَعْطَتْنِي .6. يَأْتيه .
masc. perf.
he will come to him.
8. Kue = I gave it to thee.
= he gave it to me.
9.
11.
أَعْطَيْتُكَهُ
أَعْطَانِي إِيَّاهُ 10.
.etc إِيَّاكَ إِيَّايَ
.thee we serve = إِيَّاكَ نَعْبُدُ كنته rather than كُنْتُ إِيَّاه 12.
I was he.
? 45.]
57
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
45. INFLECTION BY STATE AND MOOD OF THE ACTIVE VOICE.
1. The Perfect and Imperfect differ in inflection in that the marks of
the numbers, genders and persons are only affixed to the Perfect, whereas
they are both affixed and prefixed to the Imperfect.
2. The Imperfect is formed by prefixing to the root for the 3d masc.,
and, as will be supposed, for the fem. and all 2d persons, for the 1st
sg., and for the 1st pl. (? 44.).
ن
3. The Imperfect prefix takes fatha in the Act. of the first form,
and of the fifth and eleventh forms inclusive,¹ and damma in the Act. of
the second, third and fourth forms,² and in the Pass. of all forms.3
4. The usual forms for transitive verbs are those having fatha with
their second radical in the Perfect, and damma in the Imperfect and
Imperative. Forms occur having kesra or damma with the second radical
of the Perfect, in which case the verbs are intransitive (? 36. 3).
5. When the second radical of the Perfect has fatḥa, it may take either
damma or kesra in the Imperfect. Many verbs admit of both forms.5
Verbs whose second or third radical is a guttural generally retain in the
Imperfect the fatha of the Perfect.6
6. When the second radical of the Perfect has kesra, the Imperfect
takes fatha. Only a few verbs retain the kesra in the Imperfect.8
7
7. When the second radical of the Perfect has damma, that vowel is
retained in the Imperfect.9
8. The Indicative of the Imperfect is distinguished by the third radical
having damma.¹
9 The Subjunctive of the Imperfect changes the damma of the final
radical (8) into fatha.10 This change occurs whenever the verb is pre-
ceded by any one of the particles (= that), Í (= certainly not), and
! (= then, in that case).11 These particles show that, expressed
or understood, is the real instrument in forming the Subjunctive, and
changing the damma into fatḥa (?? 41. 3, 46. 1). The omission of
J
E
آن
takes place especially after the particles (= to, that), {(= in order),
لِكَى
~
SA (= in order to), _ (= until), and after the conjunctions
, and sometimes, together with the omission of another word, after
(= or), and the affirmative J
and
58
[ 45.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
10. The Jussive is denoted by the absence of any vowel with the third
radical12 (% 41. 4, 5). In consequence of the absence of any vowel
with the third radical, the Jussive is sometimes called the apocopated
Imperfect.
نَ
ن
11. Those forms of the Indicative which end in and
reject these
syllables in the Subjunctive and Jussive, because the genders, numbers
and persons are otherwise distinctly indicated. Exceptions to this are
the 2d and 3d pl. fem. where is retained as being necessary to mark
the gender.
12. The Energetic is formed by adding the termination
(1st Ener-
¿–
getic) or (2d Energetic) to the Jussive (?? 41. 5, 13. 1).13 If the
Jussive ends in long kesra or long ḍamma, the fatḥa of - or - is
elided, and the long vowel of the verbal form shortened, because it is in
a shut syllable.14 In the dual, the first fatha ofis absorbed by the
of the termination, and the second weakened into a kesra through the
influence of the same long vowel.15 In the 2d and 3d pl. fem. the fatḥa
of the verb unites with the initial fatha of into a long fatha, and, in
consequence, the second fatha of
becomes kesra.16 The syllable
of the 2d Energetic is attached only to those persons which have, in
the 1st Energetic, a short vowel before; and not to the dual, for then
the dual forms would coincide with those of the singular; and not to the
fem. plural, on account of euphony. Before alif with waşla the n of the
termination is rejected. is sometimes written ↑≤ and pro-
nounced in pause |-
13. The Imperative may be said to be formed from the Jussive by
rejecting the prefix of the 2d sg. Hence it has the same characteristic
vowel as the Jussive; but, since it then begins with two consonants,
which is inadmissible, it takes a short prosthetic vowel, viz., . This
vowel is pronounced with damma, when the second radical of the Imper-
fect has damma; and with kesra, when the second radical has kesra or
fatḥa.17 The Imperative exists only in the second person. For other
persons, the apocopated Imperfect, prefixed by the affirmative J, is used.18
? 46.1
59
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
For the prohibitive Imperative, the apocopated Imperfect, or Jussive,
prefixed by the negative Ý (= not), is employed (? 41. 6).
يَقْتُلُ 1 - .Examples يُقَتِّلُ . يُقْتَلُ . and يَقْتُلُ قَتَلَ 4.
يَقْطَعُ قَطَعَ 6 يَعْطِسُ and يَعْمُسُ عَطَسَ يَجْلِسُ جَلَسَ
.
10. يَحْسُنُ حَسُنَ 9 يَحْسِبُ حَسِبَ 8 يَعْمَلُ عَمِلَ 7
يَقْتُل 12. لَيْسَ جَيّدًا أَنْ يَكُونَ آدَمُ وَحْدَهُ 11 يَقْتُلَ
13.
14
يَقْتُلَن يَقْتُلَنَّ تَقْتُلِن and تَقْتُلن and Energ's تقتلي Jus .
أُقْتُل يَقْتُلُ 17 يَقْتُلْنَانِ يَقْتُلْنَ 16.
لِيَضْرِبْ
18.
15.
and
يَقْتُلَان يَقْتُلا .
إِضْرِبْ يَضْرِبُ
N. B. For the inflection of the Active Voice of the Strong Verb, see
Paradigm A. For other forms, according to rules 4-7 of this section,
see close of Paradigm B.
46. THE INFLECTION AND THE SHORT VOWELS.
1. Fatḥa indicates action resulting in a certain condition (? 36. 3).
Therefore, fatha indicates that which, as a result, is subordinate to some-
thing else. And, therefore also, fatha becomes the characteristic vowel
of the Subjunctive or subordinate mood or condition (8 45. 9).
2. On the same principle, as damma indicates simple action and contin-
uous condition (2 36. 3), it therefore becomes the characteristic vowel of
the Indicative mood. Moreover, as denoting completed action, or a com-
pleteness of idea, it becomes the predominant vowel of the Jussive and
Energetic moods.
3. As to the noun and the verb, the general rule, then, is that what is
a Nominative in nouns is an Indicative in verbs, and what is the Accusa-
tive in nouns is the Subjunctive in verbs, and whereas damma is the sign
of the Nominative in nouns, so is damma the sign of the Indicative in
verbs, and as fatha is the sign of the Accusative in nouns, so is fatha the
sign of the Subjunctive in verbs (? 36. 3).
4. In the Perfect, it is the act that is placed prominently forward,
because completed; while the marks of the person by whom the act was
done appear as affixed. In the Imperfect, it is the agent who is placed
prominently forward, because still engaged in the act; and, consequently,
60
[% 47.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
the marks of that agent or person appear more generally as prefixed. The
prefixes and affixes constitute strictly nominative pronouns by which the
different persons of the verb are formed; the affixes serve for the Perfect,
the prefixes serve for the Imperfect, the tense itself being indeclinable.
We have, then,-
which simply expresses the act of "killing” in the Perfect.
where the affixed fatḥa represents the pronoun "he" (= he
killed).
(༠•
where fatha again represents the pronoun, and the feminine
termination. And so throughout.
Then again,-
,
يَقْتُلُ
which simply expresses the act of "killing" in the Imperfect.
where is the prefixed pronoun he with the Imperfect.
ی
where is the prefixed pronoun she with the Imperfect, etc.
47. APOCOPATION.
1. The Imperfect of the verb is the only part of speech which can lose
its final vowel altogether.
2. This apocopation may take place, in certain cases, with either one or
two verbs.
3. The cases in which one verb loses its final syllable are as follows:-
a. After ¿Í (= not) and LJ (= not yet), which give a past negative
sense to the Imperfect.1
b. After the particle J used in an Imperative sense.2
c. After prohibitive.³
4. There are thirteen particles which apocopate the Imperfect of two
verbs. They are ¿↓ (= iƒ), Los! (= whenever that),
&!
إِن
(= whosoever),
Land Lō (= whatsoever), (=whichever), andão (=when-
G Ulf
SE
WH
من
أيان
متى
0I
ever, when), |3! (= whenever, poetical), and ¯† (= wherever,
4
where), (= however). Of these particles it is to be observed,—
a. The first two are true particles; the remainder are strictly nouns
implying a condition; and all are indeclinable, except
$33
اي
?? 48, 49.]
61
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
حيث
b. and I do not apocopate the Imperfect, unless joined with
Lo (= soever), after an indefinite noun (= a certain, or any whatever).
C.
مَنْ and مَا مَهمَا
be so joined, or may not.
are never joined with ; the remainder may
d. In a conditional sentence, when the Imperfect of the second
clause is not introduced by one of the conjunctions
syllable is apocopated.
or, its last
e. When waşla follows the apocopated form, the sukoon is changed
into kesra, according to the rules in ? 15. 2, 5. d.
Examples.-1. he did not stand.
= لَمْ يَقُمْ
لَا تَصْرِبْ .
do not strike.
4.
2.
= لِيَضْرِبْ
let him strike.
if you are = إِنَّ تَكْسَلْ تَخْسَرْ ..
48.
lazy, you will come to want, etc.
THE INFLECTION OF THE PASSIVE VOICE OF THE STRONG VERB.
1. The Passive is distinguished from the Active by a change of vowels.
2. In the Perfect Passive the first radical has damma, and the second
radical has kesra.
3. In the Imperfect Passive the prefixes take damma, and the second
radical fatha.
4. The Passive has no form for the Imperative. The Jussive is used
instead.
5. The Passive Participle of the first 'or simple form of the triliteral
In all the derived forms, as also
G
مَفْعُول verb is always of the measure
in all the quadriliterals, the me em takes damma, instead of fatha.
6. The vocalization of the Passive remains always the same, whatever
be the vowel of the second radical of the Active Perfect and Imperfect.
N. B. For the inflection of the Passive Voice of the simple Strong Verb
see Paradigm B.
49. DERIVED FORMS OF THE STRONG VERB.
1. The second radical of the Perfect Active has fatḥa in all the derived
forms.
2. The second radical of the Imperfect Active has fatha in the fifth and
sixth forms, kesra in the rest; the Imperfects of the ninth and eleventh
forms being contractions (6).¹
62
[? 49.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
3. The prefixes of the Imperfect Active have damma in the second,
third and fourth forms, fatḥa in the rest.
4. The vowel of the final radical is an inflectional termination, affected
by particles and other governing words, like the case-endings of nouns.
5. The characteristic alif of the fourth form disappears when another
letter is prefixed.
6. The original measures of the ninth and eleventh forms were
إفْعَلَلَ
and J. But in such cases, when the last radical has a vowel, the
preceding radical loses its vowel, the two being combined into one letter
with tashdeed; when the last radical has no vowel, the word remains
uncontracted.2
7. The Passive (Perfect and Imperfect) of the derived forms is analo-
gous, in formation, to the ground or simple form: the Imperfects of the
first and fourth forms being identical, and those of the fifth and sixth
forms being distinguished from the Imperfects Active by the prefixes
taking damma, instead of fatḥa.
8. The idea of the Perfect Passive being expressed by the damma of
the first radical, and the idea of the third form being expressed by
lengthening the vowel of the first radical, therefore the Passive of the
third form, in which both ideas are united, is, and therefore also
تُقُتِلَ the Passive of the sixth form is
9. In the Perfect Passive of the fifth and sixth forms, both the fatḥa of
the first radical and that of the characteristic (reflexive) are changed
to damma. The same is true of the characteristic and the prosthetic
alif of the seventh, eighth and tenth forms.
10. The ninth and eleventh forms have no Passive, because they are
neutral in signification.
11. When a root begins with ☺, ☺, 7, 3, 3, 3, (~, ; vo, vò, b or
دس
, the characteristic of the fifth and sixth forms sometimes loses its
vowel, and unites with the first radical to form a double letter, to which
is prefixed a prosthetic alif if the form begins with two consonants.³
12. The of the fifth and sixth forms is sometimes omitted in those
persons of the Imperfect Active to which is prefixed, viz., 2d sg. du.
and pl. m. and f., 3d sg. and du. f. When such omission occurs, the form
remains distinguished from other forms by the fathas of the prefixed →
and of the second radical, one or both.
@ 50.]
63
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
13. Verbs whose first radical is 1,,,,, or have no regular
seventh form, the fifth, eighth, or Passive of the first being used instead.
14. If the first radical of a verb is the characteristic
form frequently unites with it into
15. If the first radical is or
ت
W
4
W
the characteristic
ن
of the seventh
of the eighth
form unites with the initial into, and with the initial into
5
W
or
16. If the first radical is ◊, ¿ or the characteristic of the eighth
;
ت
form is changed into which unites with an initial into 3, and with an
initial into or 3, according to usage.6
17. If the first radical is,,
or, the characteristic is
changed into ▲ which unites with an initial
into L, with an initial
W
W
ض into
ض
intoor, and sometimes with initial
2.
يَقْتَللُ for يَقْتَلُ 1 - .Examples but اِصْفَرَرَ for إِصْفَ .
3.
إسمـ
for
مَحَى from إِمَّحَى
or
إِنْمَحَى .
تسمع
6.
from إِنْتَبَعَ for إِتَّبَعَ زاد from إِزْنَادَ for إِزْدَادَ .
تَبِعَ
إصْطَلَعَ
from
صَلَحَ
etc.
5.
7.
N. B. For the inflection of the principal parts of the Derived Forms, see
Paradigm C.
50. THE INFLECTION OF THE QUADRILITERAL VERB.
1. The four forms of the Quadriliteral Verb follow, throughout their
inflection, the second, fifth, seventh and ninth forms of the triliteral.
2. The prefixed to certain persons in the Imperfect Active, is omit-
ted in the second form of the Quadriliteral Verb, as in the fifth form of
the triliteral. Cf. 49. 12.
N. B. For the inflection of the principal parts of the Quadriliteral Verb,
see Paradigm D.
XI. The Weak Verb; its Inflection.
51. KINDS OF WEAK VERBS.
1. Weak Verbs are those of which the second and third radicals are
alike, or which contain one or more of the weak letters, which letters, on
account of their weakness, are subject to transformation or rejection
( 43. 3).
2. The weak letters are
i,
بي,
The ↑ is called hamza, not alif,
because alif is not regarded as a consonant, but only as a support for
hamza, or as a letter of prolongation.
3. The Weak Verbs are of five kinds; the Doubled, Hamzated, Assim-
ilated, Hollow and Defective.
4. The Doubled Verbs are those in which the second and third radicals
are alike, and in the inflections of which there is an assimilation of the
last two letters, for the sake of euphony.1
5. The Hamzated Verbs are those in which one of the three radicals is
a hamza (2).2
or
ی
3
6. The Assimilated Verbs are those in which the first radical is either
They are called assimilated because either of these weak
letters, in this position, affects the forms of the verb only in a slight
degree, the inflection being assimilated to the strong verb.
ي
7. The Hollow Verbs are those which have one of the weak letters or
for the medial radical.4
8. The Defective Verbs are those of which the final radical is a weak
letter.5
9. Combinations of the above may occur giving verbs doubly and trebly
weak, according as they have two or all three of the radicals weak letters.6
مَدَدَ for مَدٌ 1 - .Examples. قَرَأَ سَأَلَ أَخَذَ . يَبِسَ وَعَدَ 3.
4. Ils (for Jaš), ¿l (for 215).
6.
H
أوى رأى . رَضَو for) رَضِي
5. ljé (for ÿjė), so)
(for
رَمَيَ
? 52.]
65
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
52. DOUBLED VERBS.
1. Doubled Verbs are those which have the second and third radicals
alike (2 51. 4).
2. When both the first and third radicals have vowels, the second rad-
ical rejects its vowel, and unites with the third, forming a double letter,
marked with tashdeed.¹
3. When the third radical has a vowel, but the first is destitute of one,
the second radical throws back its vowel upon the first, and then com-
bines with the third, thus forming a double letter.2 But if the third rad-
ical has no vowel, the second retains its vowel, and no contraction occurs. 3
4. In the Perfect and Imperfect, the assimilated letters are resolved
whenever the second of the two letters would be quiescent; for otherwise
there would be a violation of the rule which prohibits the coming together
of two quiescent letters.
5. In the Jussive, the second radical sometimes throws back its vowel
upon the first, and combines with the third, in which case the doubled
letter takes a supplemental vowel ( 19. 3). In verbs that have fatha or
kesra in the Imperfect, this vowel may be either fatha or kesra; and in
those having damma, it may be any one of the three vowels.4
6. In the Imperative, those persons whose third radical has a vowel
(sg. f., du. and pl. m.), frequently keep the second radical apart from the
third.5 When the usual contraction takes place, the prosthetic alif is, of
course, not necessary.6 The m. sg. undergoes the same contraction as the
Jussive (5), at the same time rejecting prosthetic alif.7
7. When the verb has a suffix, the supplemental vowel chosen depends,
to some degree, upon the vowel of the suffix.8
8. The rules applying to the Active of the first form apply also to its
Passive, and to the third, fourth, sixth, seventh, eighth and tenth forms.
9. In the second, fifth, ninth and eleventh forms, the second or third
radical cannot be combined with the other, because already doubled.9
10. In the third, sixth and eleventh forms, long fatha precedes the
double consonant,—which occurs in the case of fatha alone. Forms with
long damma and long kesra are not contracted. Uncontracted forms with
long fatha occur.
11. In the third and sixth forms, the characteristic alif is, in the Pass.,
changed by damma, the characteristic vowel of that voice, into the corre-
sponding vowel-letter waw.
12. The Jussive of the derived forms may undergo the same contraction,
shifting of vowels, and reception of an auxiliary vowel, as the Jussive of
the ground form.
66
[? 53.
AN ARABIC MANUAL
Examples.-1. for
W
2.
فَرَرْتَ 3. يعض 4.
يَمْدُهُ for يَمُدُّ .
يَمُدَّ written يَمُدُّ or يَمُدّ or for يَمُلُّ written يَمُدُّ
w
or for, and or or
use
5. S
6.
5. يَمْدُدْ
فرر
9.
فرى
7.
فرد
for 8.85, but Los
رده
رُدَّهَا
N. B. For the inflection of the Active Voice of Doubled Verbs, see
Paradigm E. For the inflection of the Passive Voice of Doubled
Verbs, see Paradigm F. For different forms of Doubled Verbs, see
close of Paradigm F. For the principal parts of the Derived Forms
Paradigm G.
of Doubled Verbs, see
53. HAMZATED VERBS.
1. Hamzated Verbs are verbs having hamza for one of the three radicals
(2 51. 2, 5).
2. Hamzated Verbs are divided into three classes, according as the
hamza is the first, second or third radical.¹
3. When alif with hamza and sukoon, at the end of a syllable, is pre-
ceded by one of the heterogeneous vowels damma and kesra, the alif is
converted after damma into the homogeneous waw, and after kesra into
the homogeneous yay.2 The hamza, retained over the waw and yay,
shows the origin of these letters as being from alif with hamza. It also
shows that the syllables thus formed are not to be confused in pro-
nunciation with long damma and long kesra; as, in the former case, the
damma and kesra remain short, and the waw and yay with hamza are
pronounced as alif with hamza.3 The dots of the yay are, in such
cases, omitted.
4. Again, alif with hamza is changed into waw or yay with hamza,
when it is accompanied with damma or kesra and preceded by fatha, or
with fatha and preceded by damma or kesra; and into yay with hamza,
when it is accompanied with kesra and preceded by damma.4
5. Once more, alif with hamza is changed into waw or yay with
hamza, in a syllable which begins with an alif hamzatun accompanied
with damma or kesra, and is preceded by a syllable ending in a conso-
nant.5
6. Waw and yay lose hamza and sukoon after an alif hamzatun.6
7. When an alif of prolongation follows the radical alif with hamza
and fatḥa, the two alifs are combined into one, which is written either
253.]
67
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
with madda alone, or with madda accompanied by a hamza to the right of
the alif, or sometimes with hamza and a perpendicular fatha. The
same thing occurs when a radical alif with hamza has sukoon and is
preceded by an alif hamzatun with fatha.8
8. According to a recent development in the language, alif hamzatun
with fatha is changed into waw, when preceded by fatha and followed by
an alif of prolongation.9
E
أَخَذَ
9. The verbs ¿ƒ (= to take), Joř
امر
(= to order), and Ji (= to eat),
أكل
reject the first radical in the Imperative.10 When preceded by 5 or
(= and), the radical alif of the Imperative
others continue to reject it.
E
is restored, but the
10. In the eighth form, the first radical of ƒ is assimilated to the
characteristic of that form.11 A like assimilation occurs with a few
other verbs.
11. Verbs medial radical hamza are sometimes inflected like verbs
medial radical waw and yay, taking an alif of prolongation instead of
the radical hamza with fatḥa.12 The alif hamzatun is sometimes elided,
its vowel being given to the preceding consonant.13
2.
for
بَرَأَ سَأَلَ أَثَرَ 1 - .Examples
بوس
3. 335 = danu-'a not danu-wa, and
دنو
shani-ta.
6.
برأت for برنت and
يَأْثَرُ
شنت
shani'-ta not
4. for, Jaw for JL, etc. 5.
7.
و
يبوس
or
for
امر آمر
آثَرَ
(= to prefer).
8.
9.
و
أوثر not أوثر and إِنسِر not إِيسِرُ يَبْأَسُ
.(to command, order = ) آمر third form of أَمَرَ for أَمَرَ
for أثر or اثر الأثر أثر fourth form of
or
or
for إنتحل 11. كُل مُرْ خُد 10. تَمَرُوا or نَا أَمَرُوا for تَوَامَرُوا
إِيتَخَذَ يَسْأَلُ for يَسَالُ سَأَلَ for سَالَ ..
13. for يَسَلُ ..
يَسْأَلُ
N. B. For the different forms of Hamzated Verbs, see Paradigm H.
For the principal parts of the Derived Forms of Hamzated Verbs,
see Paradigm I.
68
[8 54.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
54. ASSIMILATED VERBS.
1. Assimilated Verbs are those in which the first radical is either
S (8 51. 6).
or
2. Verbs first radical, having kesra as the characteristic vowel of the
Imperfect and Imperative, reject the in these forms.1
,
3. Verbs first radical, having fatha or damma as the characteristic
vowel of the Imperfect and Imperative, retain, in these forms.2 The
same is true of verbs first radical, and second radical doubled.³
4. A few verbs constitute an exception to 3, in that they drop the
initial 9
even though the characteristic vowel of the Imperfect and Im-
perative is fatha.4
"
, is changed into
5. When kesra or damma precedes a vowelless the
of prolongation, according to the preceding vowel.5
or S
6. When kesra or damma precedes a vowelless, the S is changed
into
, or of prolongation, according to the preceding vowel.6
7. Verbs first radical are inflected in nearly all their forms like the
strong verbs.7
8. In the eighth form,
and
ي
are assimilated into the characteristic
W
☺,
giving for, and
يت and وت
Examples.—1. Imperfect
Imperative
from
5 (= to beget).
2. Imperfect
Imperative
(for
(5)) from J
(to be afraid). 3. Imperfect
یود
(for 35), Imperative S
وجل
إيد
(for 5591 (5)) from 55 (for J55) (= to love). 4. og (= to place),
وَضَعَ
Imperfect Imperative 5. jul for jo 6. Lin
ضع
إِيجَل
إِيسار
8.
يينع or يينع ينع إِوْتَعَدَ إِبْتَعَدَ for إِتَّعَلَ ..
يَضَعُ
إِيْسَار for
7.
(5)) from ¿c, (= to promise).
N. B. For the different forms and for the derived forms of Assimilated
Verbs, see Paradigm K.
855.1
69
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
ی
55. HOLLOW VERBS.
1. The Hollow Verbs are those which have one of the weak letters, or
for the medial radical (8′51. 7).
2. The Hollow Verbs differ from the strong verbs only in the first,
fourth, seventh, eighth and tenth forms.
ی or
3. When the first radical is destitute of a vowel, and the third has one,
the vowel of the second radical is transferred to the first, and the
9
is changed to that letter of prolongation which is homogeneous to the
vowel the first radical thus receives.1
4. In case the third radical loses its vowel, the long vowels are changed
into the corresponding short ones, as a closed syllable does not admit of
a long vowel.2
5. As a result of rules 3 and 4, the Imperative of the first form loses
its prosthetic alif3 (8% 45. 13; 52. 6).
6. When three open syllables follow one another, the first having fatḥa
and the last any vowel, then the, or of the middle syllable is changed
into alif of prolongation, regardless as to what may be the vowel accom-
panying it.4
و
7. But when the vowel of the first radical is damma, and the or is
accompanied by kesra, the damma is elided and the kesra substituted in
its place, as a result of which the
8. When the first radical has
vowel, three cases arise:
or
or S becomes
ي
of prolongation.5
fatha and the third is destitute of a
و
ي
with fatḥa. In this case the second
a. The second radical is
radical is elided, along with its vowel; but its influence is sufficiently
strong to change the fatha of the first radical into damma, if it was
into kesra, if it was S.6
and
,,
with kesra. In this
b. The second radical is, with damma, or
case, also, the second radical is elided along with its vowel; but its
influence is sufficient to change the fatha of the first radical into the
homogeneous vowel.7
c. The second radical is, with kesra. In this case the same elision
takes place; but the influence of the characteristic kesra is sufficient to
change the fatha of the first radical into kesra.8
9. In the first, seventh and eighth forms, if the third radical of the Perf.
Pass. loses its vowel, the of prolongation (7) is shortened into kesra (4).9
10. Verbs medial radical, generally take damma, and verbs medial
radical generally take kesra as the characteristic vowel of the Imper-
fect.10 Some, of the forms, take fatha in the Imperfect.11
70
[ 55.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
و
ي
11. When the third radical of verbs medial radical and is or
in the pronominal
, these letters combine with an initial
suffixes, resulting in and .12
W
W
or
12. In the Passive of the third and sixth forms of verbs medial
the
as then
, of prolongation does not coalesce with the second radical into
the peculiarity of these forms would be destroyed, and a confusion be-
tween these and the second and fifth forms would result.13 For the same
reason, no coalition occurs in the same forms of verbs medial
13. In regard to inflection, it is to be observed further that—
a. Some verbs medial and
throughout like strong verbs.14
بي
Ás are inflected
فَعِلَ of the form
ي
و
ي
b. Some verbs medial and
the strong or weak inflection.15
c. A few verbs medial
follow, in the fourth form, either
, have only the strong inflection in the
eighth form, used to signify reciprocity.1
,
16
d. Many verbs medial admit of either inflection in the tenth
form, but generally assume the weak; a few, however, almost uniformly
adopt the strong.17
يُقِيمُ becomes يقوم and يَقُولُ becomes يقولُ .1 .Examples يَقُل 2.
اقول
.etc ) يقول for) يَقُول for
يَقُولُ
قُلْ أُقل
(3)), 3. becomes successively Î,
4. Í becomes lá, and
5. J becomes J becomes Jus 6.
سير
قومت
becomes, etc.
becomes,
and
becomes CIL, and
خَوِفَ
يَزُولُ
سِرْتَ
طَوُلتَ .
becomes (مونت for) موت
هَبِبْتَ
سرت becomes
سَيَرْتَ
بِيعْتَ ...
وت 8.
هبت becomes
زَانَ
15 (for J55) Imperfect I, and (for
10.
بِعْتَ becomes
12.
يَنَامُ Imperfect
و for) نام ...
يَزِينُ
Imperfect
)
وہ و
بَانَ from بِنْنَا for بنا and و for مَاتَ from مُنْتُ for مُتٌ
قول not قول ..
قُووِلَ
13.
((بين)
14.
سَوِدَ يَسْوَدُ Imperfect
15.
إِسْتَجَابَ 17 جار rom اجْتَوَر 16 راح from أروح or أَرَاحَ from
or
جَابَ from إِسْتَجوب
% 56.]
71
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
N. B. For the different forms, and for the principal parts of the Derived
Forms of Hollow Verbs, see Paradigm L. For the inflection of the
Active Voice of the Hollow Verb medial radical wa w, see Paradigm
M. For the inflection of the Active Voice medial radical y ay, see
Paradigm N. For the inflection of the Passive Voice medial radical
waw and yay, see Paradigm 0.
56. DEFECTIve Verbs.
1. Defective Verbs are those of which the final radical is a weak letter
(8 51. 8).
2. Defective Verbs are of five kinds, as follows:-
Verbs 3d rad.
66
66
((
66
66
"
ی
ی
''
(6
""
as
ljé for 5jé (= to raid).
غَزَا
رمی
فَعَلَ of the form
فَعَلَ
رَضِيَ “ فَعِلَ
خَرَيَ فَعِلَ
(6 66
แ
66
แ
(6
66
غَزَوَ
رمی
رضِيو
(= to throw).
(= to be pleased with).
(= to be ashamed).
66
66
66
فَعُلَ
(6
سرو
(= to be noble).
3. This third radical of these Defective Verbs retains its power as a
consonant, or resolves itself into a vowel, or is elided.
4. At the beginning of a syllable, the third radical retains its power as
a consonant, or is elided, as follows:-
1st. The third radical retains its power as a consonant,-
a. Between the vowels short and long fatḥa, as.
b. Between the vowels short damma and short fatḥa, as
c. Between the vowels short damma and long fatha, as
d. Between the vowels short kesra and short fatḥa, as.
•
e. Between the vowels short kesra and long fatha, as...
f. When the preceding syllable ends with a consonant,
as.
غَزَوا
سَروَتْ
تَغْزَوَانِ
رَضِيَ
Go
عزو
2d. The third radical is elided between a short vowel and the long
vowels kesra and damma, and the two vowels are contracted either into a
long vowel or a diphthong, as follows:-
72
[å 56.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
A. Into a long vowel, viz.,
a.
b.
C.
for شروا سَرُووا
رضِبُوا for رَضُوا
as
as
as
و into و
ُو
into
into
يو-
وى
ی تَغْرُوى for تَغْرَى
d.
بي
a.
into
b.
into ;
into
for
تَرْمِي
as
into
ری
B. Into a diphthong, viz.,
فَزَرُوا for غَزَوا
رميوا
ی تَرْضَيِينَ for تَرْضَيْنَ
as
as
boy for
as
5. The letter
,
passes into S
ی
between the vowels short kesra and
1
fatha, and short kesra and long fatha.2
6. At the end of a syllable, the third radical is either vocalized or
elided. It may stand at the end of a syllable either naturally,³ or after
dropping a short vowel. Accordingly the following cases arise :-
1st. When standing naturally at the end of a syllable, the third rad-
ical is vocalized in two ways, viz.,
a. If the preceding vowel is homogeneous, and
letters of prolongation; thus,
as
for سَروتَ سروت
و passes into
رَضِيتَ as - رَضِيتَ for رَضِيتَ
- passes into
ی
become
b. If the preceding vowel be heterogeneous (that is, fatha), it
forms with and the diphthongs and; thus,
و
ی
;
ramaita = رميت ghazanta for ghazawta and = غزوت
for ramayta.
2d. When the third radical stands at the end of a syllable, not
naturally, but as a result of the dropping out of a short vowel (viz.,
و
for 5 -for-and-, ;-2- for ';-, -- for 3–), it is vocal-
ized in three different ways, viz.,
3 56.]
73
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
a.
= aw and = = ay become long fatha, which, for dis-
tinction, is written for aw, and for ay, whence we
have
b. ; 2
-
for 5 and
غَزَوَ
غَزَا
= uw becomes
دمتی
=
for
حَى
رمی
etc.
long damma, whence, for
C.
يغزو
ی
تَرْمِي
etc.
iy becomes
long kesra, whence for
تَرْمِي
etc.
3d. The third radical is elided,-
a. When it stands naturally at the end of a syllable. This
takes place in the Jussive and Imperative, in which the sig-
nification of the form produces the abbreviation.5
b. When it does not naturally stand at the end of a syllable.
This takes place in the Participle, before the tenween of
damma and kesra. These vowels are elided at the same time;
but the tenween is thrown back upon the kesra of the second
radical.6
7. After
has been introduced for, (according to rule 5) into the 3d
sg. m. Perf., it is maintained throughout the entire inflection, subject to
the above rules.7
8. Final,
is changed into in all the derived forms of the verb.8
9. In the Passive Participle of verbs third radical the of the long
vowel, coalesces with the radical
ی
ی
شو
و
و
W
9
into. In verbs third radical
,
,
the influence of the third radical converts this secondary into
W
the two coalesce into, and consequently the preceding damma
becomes kesra.10 Such verbs as
رضِيَ
, in which the final
ی
stands for
,,
admit of either form, the general form being placed first in the example.11
Examples.-1. for
رَضِيَ
فَعَلْتَ
أَرْضَى
6.
4.
یرمی
رَضِو
for
2.
غُرِيَ غزوا for غزى like و 3.
غَزَوْتَ
for أَرْضَ and يَرْضَى for يَر
5.
for Gol and
رامی رام
رَامِي
رامي
etc.
and رَضِوَ for) رَضِيَ .
7.
74
[ε 57.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
3,0
مغزو
etc.
9.
43
رَاضَى غَزَى
أَرْضَى يَرْضَى رَضِيتَ then
etc.
8.
$90- $907
for
11.
69
10.
مرموی مرمی 107 مرمی مرضو or مرضی
مغزوو
for go
9,
N. B. For the different forms, and for the principal parts of the Derived
Forms, of Defective Verbs, see Paradigm P. For the inflection of
the Active Voice, Defective Verb, third radical medial radical
fatḥaed, see Paradigm R. For the inflection of the Active Voice,
Defective Verb, third radical, medial radical fatḥaed, see Paradigm
S. For the inflection of the Active Voice, Defective Verb, third rad-
ical and
,
medial radical kesraed, see Paradigm T. For the in-
flection of the Passive Voice, Defective Verb, third radical, and S,
see Paradigm U.
a
ی
57. VERBS DOUBLY WEAK.
1. Verbs Doubly Weak include two classes.
The First Class consists of verbs having both an alif hamzatun and
or among their radicals. They are of three kinds, as follows:-
a. Hamzated verb and first radical, or S. The hamza may be (1)
the second radical,¹ or (2) the third radical.2 These verbs follow in their
inflection both the classes to which they belong.3
4
ی
S.
b. Hamzated verb and second radical or The hamza may be
(1) the first radical, or (2) the third radical.5 Each kind unites the
peculiarities of the two classes to which it belongs. See Paradigm V.
c. Hamzated verb and third radical, or . The hamza may be (1)
the first radical,6 or (2) the second radical. These verbs follow in their
inflection the two classes of verbs to which they belong. See Paradigm V.
2. The Imperative of the verb (= to come) is sometimes shortened
to, in pause x. And all Imperatives consisting of one letter add
in pause 8 (? 20. 7).
E
E
୪
3. The alif hamzatun of the verb to see) is generally elided in
the Imperfect and Imperative. In the Perfect Active the hamza is gen-
erally retained. The Perfect Passive is. In the Imperfect Passive
the hamza is elided, as in the Active. In the fourth form, when this
verb signifies to show, the hamza is always elided. Otherwise the hamza
is retained. See Paradigm V.
The Second Class of Doubly Weak Verbs consists of those verbs in
which
occurs twice. They are of two kinds, as follows:-
or
ی
258.]
75
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
a. Those in which
9 or is the first and third radical.10 These
verbs follow in their inflection the verbs of the two classes first and third
radical or S. See Paradigm V.
b. Those in which
" or is the second and third radical.11 The
second radical undergoes no change in inflection. See Paradigm V.
4. The verb admits of the contraction of the two yays in those
persons of the Perfect, first form, in which the second yay has a vowel,12
and also in the Imperfect of the first form and Participle of the second
form. The elision of the second yay of the same verb occurs in the
Perfect and Imperfect of the tenth form, when it signifies to feel shame.13
Examples.—1. ‚†5 (= to frighten).
to tread upon).
3. Perf.
Perf. 35, Impf
يَطَأُ وَطِى
155 (= to smooth), and 5 (=
وَدَاً 2.
وَأَرَ
وَطِى
;يَدَأُ
‚15, Impf.; Perf. 155, Impf.
4. ĢĪ or ĢĪ½ (for (51) (= to return);
and Ñor ν (for Í‚†) (= to return).
E
سَاء
5. złú (for saw) (= to ill-
treat); and z♫ (for₹5) (= to come); and sƖŵ (for ≤ŵ) (— to
E
(شَيء
wish).
6. ŠĪ (= to come);
E
SÏ (=
= to refuse); (=to grieve).
Sw↑
;
7. (= to be far off); (to utter a cry). 8. & for, from
صَلَّى نَأَى
35 (=
etc.
وَفَى
دير
E
.
to keep faith); and, for
for 5, from (= to see).
sore footed).
(for
رای
³ (= to guard); 15 (= to be near);
وَقَى 10.
9. 5.
to be
=) وَجِيَ
11. (= to roast); 553 (= to be strong);
شوى
عَيِب
(= to live); _A (= to be weak in speech).
12.
13
حي
يَسْتَحِي إِسْتَحَى 3.
etc.
58. VERBS TREBLY WEAK.
1. Trebly Weak Verbs include two classes.
First Class, those in which one radical is hamza, and the other two
or S.
They are of two kinds, as follows:-
أَوَى
a. Those in which the hamza is the first radical, as (= to repair
I
to). These are inflected like the verbs and
(8 57. 2d class, b).
76
[² 59.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
E
6. Those in which the hamza is the second radical, as 5 (= to
promise). These are inflected like the verbs and 55 (857. 2d cl.,
a). See Paradigm W.
Second Class, those in which all three radicals are
class seems to include only one verb, rarely used, viz.,
or S. This
(= to write the
letter S).
59. REMAINING Verbs.
1. The negative substantive verb
(= he is not) has no Imperfect
or Imperative, and is inflected in the Perfect like the verb medial radical
and S. See Paradigm W.
عَسَى
2. The verb (= to be near to doing a thing = perhaps) is imper-
fectly inflected, and is applied in the form of a Perfect to that which
occurs in the present.
3. The verbs → (= give here = bring here) and J´´ (= come) are
found only in the Imperative, where they are regularly inflected.
=)
( بِئْسَ
4. The Verbs of Praise and Blame are pes (= to be good) and ma
to be bad). They are used as exclamations, and are generally not inflected,
بِئْسَتْ and نِعْمَتْ though the feminine forms
occur.
5. The Verbs of Surprise or Wonder have two forms of expression.
The one is the 3d sg. m. Perf. Act. of the fourth form, preceded by L
and followed by the accusative of the object that causes the surprise.
The other is the 2d sg. m. Imv. of the fourth form, followed by the prep-
osition with the genitive.
N. B. For a table of the formation of Verbal Nouns from Weak Verbs,
see Paradigm X.
XII. The Noun.
60. ITS KINDS.
1. Nouns (Substantive and Adjective) are divided into two classes, viz.,
Primitive and Derivative.
2. The Primitive Nouns are all substantives.1
3. The Derivative Nouns may be substantives or adjectives. They are
derived either from verbs,2 or from nouns 3
4. Nouns derived from verbs are divided into two classes, viz., Infinitives,
or Noun of Action, and Participles, or Noun of Agent and Patient. The
Infinitives are, by their nature, substantives, but have come to be used
also as adjectives. The Participles are, by their nature, adjectives, but
have come to be used also as substantives.
5. Connected with the Infinitives are the four following classes of
nouns derived from verbs:-
a. The Noun of Unity.
b. The Noun of Kind.
c. The Noun of Place and Time.
d. The Noun of Instrument.
6. Nouns derived from other nouns are divided into six classes, as
follows:
a. The Noun of Individuality.
b. The Noun of Abundance.
c. The Noun of the Vessel.
d. The Noun of Relation.
e. The Abstract Noun of Quality.
f. The Noun Diminutive.
Examples.—1. №3) (= a man). 2. ¿lico (= a key), from
) إِنْسَانُ
مِفْتَا
to open). 3. (=human), from
إِنْسَانِي
= فَتَحَ
(= a human being,
a man).
61. NOUNS DERIVED FROM VERBS.
A. The Noun of Action.-1. The Nouns of Action, corresponding in
many respects to our Infinitives, are abstract substantives, which express
the action, passion or state indicated by the corresponding verbs, without
any reference to object, subject or time.
78
[? 61.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
2. Those Nouns of Action which may be derived from the ground-form
of the ordinary triliteral verb are formed upon numerous measures.
These measures are nearly all included in the following:-
فَعَلَةٌ ، فَعْلَةٌ ، فَعَل - فعّل - فِعَل . فِعْل . فَعِل . فَعَل . فَعْل
فعلى . فُعْلَى . فِعْلَى . فَعَلَى فَعْلَى . فُعُدَّةٌ - فُعْلَةٌ . فِعْلَةٌ ، فَعِلَةٌ
. .
فَعَالُ . فَعَلُوتُ ، فُعْلَان - فِعْلَان . فَعَلَانُ - فَعْلَانُ - فَعْلَاءِ
فُعُول . فَعُول . فَعَالِيَةٌ . نُعَالَةٌ . فِعَالَةٌ ، فَعَالَةٌ . نُعَال - فِعَال
مَفْعُل . مَفْعِل . مَفْعَلْ - فَعِيلَةٌ ، فَعِيل - فُعُولِيَّةٌ ، فَعُولِيَّةٌ ، فَعُولَةٌ
.
مَفْعُلَةً . مَفْعلَةٌ . مَفْعَلَةٌ
3. The most usual forms or measures are the following:-
G
a. Jis the measure of the abstract noun from transitive verbs of
1. فَعِلَ and فَعَلَ the forms
b. is the measure of the abstract noun from intransitive or
2 فَعَلَ neuter verbs of the form
C.
فَعَلْ
is the measure of the abstract noun from intransitive or
فَعِلَ neuter verbs of the form
فَعُولَةٌ and فَعَالَة ..
d.
verbs of the form ešt
are the measures of the abstract nouns from
4. The majority of nouns have but one form or measure. Only a few
have more than two or three measures.
5. If the middle radical of a verb may have two or three vowels, with
a corresponding change in meaning, then the verb may have several
abstract nouns, one for each form and meaning of the Perfect.5
6. If a verb has only one form, but various meanings, it frequently has
different abstract nouns, one of which is peculiar to each of its meanings.6
7. The nouns of action are used both in an active and a passive sense.7
8. The nouns formed from the derived forms of the strong triliteral
verb are of the following measures:—
? 61.]
79
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
}
فِعَالُ يَفْعَالُ تَفْعَالَ, تَفْعُلَةٌ تَفْعِلَةٌ تَفْعِيل ,Second Form ,
- فِعّال, فِيعَال, فعال, مُفَاعَلَةٌ Third Form - فعلا, فعيلى
2
. تفعَالُ تَفَقُلْ ,Fifth Form - فعال ,Fourth Form ,Sixth Form - تفال
,Eighth Form - إنفعال ,Seventh Form - تَفَاعِلٌ, تَفَاعَلَ, تَفَاعُلُ
J.
إِسْتِمْعَا Tenth Form - إعلال Ninth Form . فِعال, إِنْتِعَالَ -
إنيلا,Eleventh Thirteenth . إِنْعِيعَا Twelfth Form . إنعيلان ,Eleventh Form
G
إنْعِوَّال Form
انْعِنلَا
Fourteenth Form, J.
Fifteenth Form,
9. The nouns formed from the quadriliteral verbs are of the following
measures:-
G
تَفَعْلُل ,Second Form . فَعْلَا فِعْلَال فَعْلَلَةٌ ,First Form .
,
Fourth Form, J.
- انْعِلال
Third Form,
-
-
10. The abstract nouns of verbs medial radical doubled are formed
according to the rules of ? 52.8 Cf. Paradigm X.
11. The nouns of hamzated verbs are formed according to the rules of
53. See Paradigm X.
?
12. Verbs first radical
that reject the in the Impf. and Imv. drop
,
G
it also in the verbal noun. To compensate for this lost radical - is
added. Some verbal nouns of this class have also the form 10 If
this initial radical has damma or kesra, it may be changed to. If it
,
is without a vowel, and is preceded by kesra, it is changed to Cf.
Paradigm X.
بي
13. The nouns of verbs medial radical and
irregularities as those verbs ( 55.). It is to be observed-
; S are subject to the same
a. If the noun from a verb medial radical, or is of the form
the فعال
,
or remains unchanged.11
ي
G
b. In the form, from verb medial radical
,,
the
,
may be
changed into
12
80
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
[? 61.
c. Verbs medial radical
frequently take يَفْعِلُ فَعَلَ of the form
ي
kesra in the abstract noun commencing with augmentative meem.13
d. If the, has fatha, and is preceded by kesra, it is changed into
except in the third form,14
and
ري
e. In nouns of the fourth and tenth forms of verbs medial radical ,
ري
the second radical is elided, after throwing back its vowel upon
the first radical, and the termination — is added for compensation.15
فَعْلُولَةٌ
y:
f. In nouns of the form from verbs medial radical, and
S always takes the place of the second radical.16 See Paradigm X.
14. In nouns formed from verbs third radical, and S, the following is
to be observed:
a. The third radical is retained, when the second immediately pre-
cedes it, and is vowelless.17
b. If the second radical is
place in the form 3.18
and the third S, an assimilation takes
,the third radical عَل and فَعَلْ فَعَل. c. In nouns of the forms
S,
which takes the form of rejects its damma, throws back the tenween
upon the fatha of the second radical, and becomes quiescent.19
d. In nouns from verbs third radical of the form, the
changed, after the elision of its fatha, into an alif of prolongation.20
e. If the noun from a verb third radical, is of the form
انُعُولَةٌ
W
فُعُول
is
or
the of prolongation combines with the radical into 21 If it
9
S₁ "
9
W
ي
is from a verb third radical the of prolongation is changed, through
the influence of the third radical, into S, and combines with it into
while the damma of the second radical becomes kesra.22 Another assim-
ilation sometimes takes place, viz., of the vowel of the first syllable.23
ی
f. If the noun from a verb third radical is of the form, the
of prolongation combines with radical into
ي
W
24 In the same form
from verbs third radical the
"" ,
is changed to
of prolongation into
W
بي
ي
and combines with
ي
61.]
81
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
g. In nouns of the forms j, j and I, the third radical of
verbs third radical, and is changed into hamza on account of the pre-
,
ي
ceding long fatha.25 The same thing occurs in nouns of the third form
when it has the form, and also in the fourth, seventh and following
forms.
ي
h. Nouns of the second form of verbs third radical and always
,
take the form26 In those of the fifth and sixth forms the influ-
ence of the third radical, always
syllable into kesra, and the syllables
Paradigm X.
قَتَلَ
changes the damma of the penult
are contracted into - .27 See
ی
ـي
Examples.—1. √♫š (= to kill), and Jis (= killing); peś (= to under-
stand), and
(= understanding).
.(sitting =) جلوس
ش
3.
فَرِحَ
ness).
ظَرُفَ .
(( جَلَسَ 2.
= to sit), and
3 (= to be glad), and ~~ (= glad-
(= to be beautiful), and
لة
٥) ظَرَافَةٌ سَهُل ;(beauty =)
فَرَقَ
(= to be smooth), and ‚¿ (= smoothness).
rate) has
فَرْقُ
5. 33(= to sepa-
separation; but 55 (= to be afraid) has
fear. 6. (= to judge) has
فَرْقَ
109
فَرَقْ
judgment, but when
G
it means to curb an animal, then
قَتْلَهُ 7 حَكْم.
= his leilling
another, or his being killed himself.
8.
& for,
for ¾ã, and
for
S
and
verbal noun عِدْ يَعِدُ وَعَدَ . رَدَّ from مَرْدَدْ عدة 10 عِدَةٌ.
•
for مبيت 13.
إِقَامَةٌ
15.
12.993.
سیر قول
Je and c.
عد
11.
G U
.(to stand = ) قَامَ from قِوَامْ for قِيَام .
14.
مبيت
: إقْرَام إِسْتِقْوَام. for إِسْتِقَامَةٌ and دَامَ from دَيْمُومَةٌ 16.
رِضَى
for
رِضَى
19.
حوى..
for
193
یه
18.
17. 9.
for
(دوم)
82
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
[ 61.
21.
24.
عُدُوٌّ
هوى
G
G 1
حيوة for حلوة more correctly) حياة 20.
,,
(رضو).
أُتِي for إِنِى 23. 22 عُلُور or.
مضرر for مضى
تَسْلِيَةٌ .26 . تَجَل ..
F
.etc , هَوَى from هَوى for فَا ..
(تَجَلَّى تَجَلَّى for
B. The Noun of Unity.-1. The Noun of Unity is so called as that
which expresses the doing of an action once.
2. The Noun of Unity is formed by adding the feminine termination
The measure 1 فعلة g to the noun of action, and is of the measure
*—to
selected in the second form of triliterals is, and in the first of
فِعْلَال quadriliterals
3. Nouns of Unity derived from weak verbs do not differ from those of
strong verbs, except in adding the feminine termination.2
4. If the noun of action ends in 8, the feminine termination cannot
be added. The singleness of the action is then expressed by adding the
adjective for one. 3
5. Duals and plurals may be formed to express the doing of the action
twice or more frequently.4
Examples.—1. (= to strike), and
ضَرَبَ
4.
وَاحِدَةٌ 3.
ضَرْبَة
= a strolce.
(dual),
.(plural) نَصَرَات dual and) نَصْرَتَانِ .
وَعْدَةٌ. 2.
C. The Noun of Kind.-1. The Noun of Kind is so called because used
to indicate the manner of doing that which is expressed by the verb.
2. The Noun of Kind is of the forms from triliteral verbs.¹ From
all other verbs it is formed in the same manner as the noun of unity.
3. The Noun of Kind, like the noun of action and noun of unity, may
be used in a passive as well as an active sense.2
G
جِلْسَة 1 - .Examples
= a manner of sitting.
2.
of being thrown,
c
صرعة
= a manner
D. The Noun of Place and Time.-1. The Nouns of Place and Time
are so called because place and time are regarded as the vessels in which
the act or state is contained.
261.]
83
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
2. These nouns are formed after the analogy of the Imperfect Active
of the first form of the verb, by substituting the syllable for the pre-
fixes, and giving the second radical fatḥa, if the Imperfect has fatha or
damma, but kesra, if the Imperfect has kesra.1 A very few nouns take
kesra though the Imperfect has damma.
ی
3. Nouns of Place and Time formed from verbs first radical and
retain the first radical, and always have kesra in the second syllable.2
See Paradigm X.
ي
4. Nouns of this class formed from verbs medial radical and
Sare
subject to changes similar to those which the Imperfect of the verb
undergoes (? 55); that is, after the second radical has taken fatḥa or
kesra, according to 2, this vowel is thrown back upon the vowelless first
radical, and the, or is changed into the homogeneous letter of prolon-
gation.3
ی
و
5. Nouns of this class formed from verbs third radical and always
take fatha in the second syllable, notwithstanding rule 2. They also suf-
fer contraction similar to the noun of action in A. 14. c.4
6. Nouns of Time and Place frequently take the feminine form 5
When derived from a strong verb the second radical frequently has
damma instead of fatha. Some have the three forms.7
6
G
7. Some Nouns of Time and Place, derived from verbs first radical
have the measure .8
and
ري
8. Nouns of Time and Place from the derived forms of the triliteral
verb, or from the quadriliteral, are identical in form with the Passive
Participles.9
= a place for drinking;
4.
5.
مَرْعَى
مَنْزِلَةٌ
8. π = time
= a place of prayer,
(.to stand = ) قَامَ from مَقْوَم for مَقَام .
3.
and then
مَشْرَبْ then
يَشْرَبُ شَرِبَ 1 - .Examples
مَجْلِسٌ يَجْلِسُ
=
Uns, and then the place where or time when
several persons sit. 2.
appointment.
G
the time or place of a promise or
موعِد
رعى
(for) = pasture-ground, from (= to pasture).
مَقْبَرَةٌ .
مَهْلِكَةٌ : مَقْبَر
5. 8
= a halting-place.
مُصَلّى ...
•
وَلَدَ
of birth, from №5 (= to beget).
صَلَّى
from (= to pray).
84
[? 61.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
E. The Noun of Instrument.-1. It is the noun which denotes the
instrument employed to perform the act expressed by a verb.
2. When the Noun of Instrument is a primitive noun, it is of course
irregular.1
3. When the Noun of Instrument is derived from verbs, the most com-
mon forms are
مِفْعَلَةٌ and مِفْعَالُ مِفْعَلْ
4. The Noun of Instrument is distinguished from the noun of place
and time by the kesra of the prefixed meem. A few rare forms have
damma and fatha with meem.
5. When the Noun of Instrument is derived from verbs medial radical
and it remains uncontracted.3
ري
سكين 1-.Examples
G
مكنسة
= a file; & Lieo = a key;
مِفْتَا
= a knife.
2.
G
= a broom. 3.
مبرد
G
مروحة and مروح
= a fan.
F. The Noun of Agent and Patient.-1. The Nouns of Agent and
Patient are verbal adjectives, corresponding in nature and signification
to our participles.
2. The verbal adjectives derived from the first form of the triliteral
verb have the two principal forms of Active and Passive Participles, viz.,
1 مَفْعُول and فَاعِل
3. Other verbal adjectives derived from the first form of the verb are
called the attributes resembling the agent, i. e., in respect to inflection.
These adjectives come for the most part from neuter verbs. They imply
either the existence of an inherent quality, or a certain degree of inten-
sity.2 They are mainly of the following measures :
S
lés, tés, les,
فَعِل فَعَلْ
فَعْلَانُ فَعُولٌ فَعِيل فَعَالُ فَعَالَ فَعَل فعل فعل فِعل فعل
فُعْلٌ فَعُلْ
أَفْعَلُ فَعْلَان فَعْلَان
4. From verbal adjectives of the measure is derived an adjective
of the measure which conveys the idea of intensiveness or of
habit. Nouns indicating professions and trades are generally of this
measure. There are other less common measures of intensive adjectives,
generally indicated, however, by tashdeed or the added termination &.
5. Adjectives conveying the signification of our comparative and super-
lative are of the measure
They are derived from verbal adjectives
90€
61.1
85
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
with three radicals, or three radicals and a letter of prolongation.4 In
the superlative sense these adjectives must always have the article or be
in the construct state. When the use of the measure
I
,is impossible أَفْعَلُ
E
5
the word (= stronger) is employed instead, followed by the adverbial
accusative of the noun. Such is the case in adjectives denoting color or
deformity, because they are themselves of the form And strictly
this measure is not allowable in the case of adjectives formed from the
verbal adjectives of the passive voice and the derived forms of the verb,
though this rule is violated by usage.
6. Verbal adjectives formed from the Active and Passive Voices of the
derived forms of the triliteral verb, and from the quadriliteral verb, take
the prefix, while the characteristic vowel of the second and third rad-
icals is the same as in the corresponding Imperfects, except that in the
active adjectives of the fifth and sixth forms of the triliteral verb and the
second form of the quadriliteral they have kesra instead of fatha.6
7. In the formation of verbal adjectives from verbs medial radical
doubled, from hamzated verbs, and from verbs first radical, the rules
given in those respective sections are to be observed.
و
8. In the Active Participle of the first form of verbs medial radical
and the place of the medial radical is occupied by with hamza,
arising out of ( 53. 4).7
9. In the Passive Participle, first form, medial radical the middle
radical throws back its damma upon the preceding vowelless letter and is
then elided. Similarly in verbs medial radical S, only that to indicate
the elision of the radical the damma is changed into kesra, and conse-
quently the of prolongation into a .9
,
10. Verbal adjectives of the measure
and
S,
G
from verbs medial radical
become by transposition, then pass into, further
contracted into
G
Lis.
3.10
11. Verbal adjectives from the derived forms of verbs medial radical "
and follow the rules of their Imperfects. Those of the forms
and
ی
follow the rules of the Passive Participle.11
ی
فَعُول
9
and S
if the
12. In all adjectives derived from verbs third radical
second radical has fatha, the and, (the latter changed into S) reject
their vowel or tenween, and assume the nature of an abbreviated alif. If
the form is declinable throughout, the second radical takes the tenween.
86
[ 62.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
In this manner are formed the Passive Participle of the derived forms,
E
.212 أَفْعَلُ and adjectives of the form
to acrite ; and = ) كتب writing = a scribe, from = كاتب .1- .Examples
= handsome,
↑
حسن
F
S
حَسَن 2. كُتِبَ writen = a letter, from = written = مكتوب
WE
etc. 3.
S
.a glutton = ال eating = آكل.
احسن
حَسُنَ from
= beautiful,
أَجَلُّ
E
4.
= more or most beautiful; Jus = glorious,
= more or most glorious.
redness.
6.
(for) instead of
5. 8
,
stronger as to
أَشَدُّ حُمرة
قَائِل : مُدَحْرج يدخرج and مكرم يكرم . مُكْرِمْ يُكْرِمُ
7
for مَخُوفٌ 8 قَاوِلٌ مَخرُوف from مَخُووف for مَخُوفٌ 8.
an
G
ميت or
ميت
10.
11.
و
G
مبيوع
from
9.
مبوع
instead of مبيع 9.
S
. مات from مَوِيتْ مَيون dead, for hostile = عَدُو نا .
میود
أَرْضَوُ أَرْضَى for أَرْضَى and ;(مُعْطَو) مُعْطَى for مُعْطَى 2.
enemy.
.
62.
THE CONSTRUCTION OF VERBAL AND NOUN FORMS.
It will be found of great advantage to the student to construct for
himself noun and verb forms from verb-roots.
We may take, for example, the root Ís (= to separate, to divide),
which occurs several times in the first chapter of Genesis. It is a trilit-
eral transitive verb. The lexicon tells us that it makes its Imperfect in
kesra, which gives us This corresponds to in the table of
جلس يَفْصِلُ
different forms of strong verbs, Paradigm B.
The form of the noun of action for transitive verbs we have seen is
, and
belonging to this class, its noun of action must be,
which is the proper form.
Then by observing the different forms and rules given in the preceding
section, we find, in the same manner, that other deverbal nouns from this
root must be as follows:-
Noun of Unity..
مَفْصِل ..... Noun of Place
فَصْلَةٌ.
فَاصل .... Noun of Agent
Noun of Instrument....Isés
Noun of Patient...
مَفْصُول.
etc.
1
2 63.]
87
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
Then, as an example from the derived conjugations, we may take the
third. The measure of its Perfect is . This gives us, then, as to
فَصَلَ the root
Third Conjugation Perfect (= Jóló) = ↓óló;
66
66
يُف--- صِل = (يف---عل =) Imperfect
That is, the dashes indicate that any letters coming between the first and
second radicals remain unchanged; and, therefore, we must have as the
Imperfect of the third conjugation of the verb in question olé
In the same manner
Third Conjugation Passive Perfect (=
เ
แ
เ
فُوصِلَ = (فُوعِلَ
ي--- صَلُ = (ي --- عَل =) Imperfect
That is, the intermediate letters to occupy the place represented by the
dashes remain unchanged, and therefore we must have ole.
So in respect to the deverbal nouns of the third conjugation :
: مُفَاصَلَةٌ = (مُفَاعَلَةٌ =) Noun of Action ;
. مفصل = (مُ---عل =) Noun of Agent
That is, the intermediate letters remaining unchanged, we must have as
. مُفاصل the noun of agent
In the same manner the
Noun of Patient, and Noun of Place and Time (= ££___.') =
مُفَاصَل
=as before,
And so every root, by a logical process, adds a number of words with
their various shades of meaning to the student's vocabulary.
63. NOUNS DERIVED FROM OTHER NOUNS.
A. The Noun of Individuality.-1. The Noun of Individuality specifies
one individual out of a class, or one part out of a whole consisting of
other similar parts.
2. It is formed, like the corresponding noun of unity, by adding the
termination to the nouns that express the class or whole; thus,
G
= a fruit, from=fruit.
G
تمرة
88
[2 63.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
B. The Noun of Abundance.-1. The Noun of Abundance designates
the place where the object signified by the noun from which it is formed
is found in large numbers or quantities.
2. The measure of this noun is
. It is a variety of the nouns of
= a place where pome-
مرمنة pomegranates, and = رمان place thus
granates grow abundantly.
C. The Noun of the Vessel.-1. This noun is used to denote the vessel
which contains any thing.
2. This noun is of the same measure as the noun of instrument to
مخلب ,which it corresponds; thus
mille = حَلِيبٌ
a milk-pail, from
حَلَبْ from
or
D. The Noun of Relation.-1. The Noun of Relation, or Relative
Adjective, is formed by adding the termination
which it is derived.
493
ري
to the word from
2. This noun, or Relative Adjective, denotes that a person or thing is
in some manner connected with what is signified by the word from which
it is derived, as in respect to origin, family, sect, occupation, etc.¹
3. In the formation of these Nouns of Relation, the primitive nouns
undergo various changes, as follows:-
a. The feminine terminations,
and are rejected.2
b. The feminine termination is rejected in nouns having four
or more letters besides the .3 In those having only three letters besides
the the
ی
ی
S, Sis rejected, if the second letter has a vowel 4 and if the
second letter is vowelless, the may be rejected or changed to 9.5 S
is also rejected in nouns containing four or more letters besides the if
S,
the does not belong to the root or to the feminine termination, but is
what is termed an appended alif, i. e., giving the word to which it is
appended the form of a feminine noun, while, strictly, not of that gender.6
ی
When such nouns have only three letters besides the S, it may be
changed into or rejected.7
و
43
c. The endings T
I K
and of Relative Adjectives disappear when
new Relative Adjectives are to be formed from them. A similar thing
occurs with certain substantives.8
d. The plural terminations, and, and the dual termination
¿—, are rejected.9
uk,
e. The letter
ی when فُعَيْلَةٌ and فَعِيلة in words of the measures
not derived from weak verbs, is rejected.10 When they come from medial
"
2 63.1
89
AN ARABIC MANUAL. ·
radical doubled, or medial
G
or they remain unchanged.11 In the
, S,
is rejected when the third consonant of the نُعَيْل and فَعِيل
measures
ی
root is
or
,
5.12
S,
ی
f. In the Passive Participle verbs third radical the of prolon-
gation may be rejected, and the radical changed to the kesra of the
ی
زو
second radical becoming fatḥa, or both yays may be rejected.13
,
g. of prolongation in the measure
,
from verb third radical , فَعُولة فَعُولَةٌ
is rejected, and the second radical takes fatḥa instead of damma.14
ی
h. Alif abbreviated, as the third radical of a triliteral noun, is
changed into, before adding the termination 15 If the noun is quad-
riliteral, final
be so changed or rejected. In nouns of five letters
the is rejected. These rules apply also to the final of verbs third
radical and
ی
,
ی
.ی
may
ی
16 In
i. Hamza of the termination is always changed into
the termination the hamza may be retained or changed into 17 If
the hamza arose from an original it is retained.18
j. Primitive substantives that have lost their third weak radical
may or may not restore it in the Relative Adjective. When this radical
is restored it always appears as
k. The third radical or
9.19
,ی
تُعْلَةٌ فَعْلٌ
of the forms and remains
unchanged.20 If final
ی
of
be changed to
takes fatha.21 If the second radical is or
W
ری
,
ری
the second radical
,,
combining with the third
radical into
4 this is resolved into its original consonants, the second
radical takes fatḥa, and final is changed into 22 In words of the
measure
رفِعَالَة
, final
"
is retained, but final is changed into hamza.23
ی
Words like form their Relative Adjectives variously 24
7. In the measures and
changed into fatha.25
the kesra of the middle radical is
m. Kesra or damma of the penultimate consonant is changed to
fatha in all forms where or has been rejected, or where final has
been changed to
26
و
ی
ی
n. In the formation of a Relative Adjective from a proper name
compounded of two words, the second word is omitted, and the ending
added to the first, if the two words form a proposition, or are con-
tracted into one compound word. If the first word is in the construct
ی
90
[? 63.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
ម
ی
state, governing the second in the genitive, then the governing word, if
it be one of the nouns for father, son, mother or daughter, is rejected, and
added to the governed word. But if the first word is any other than
one of the four mentioned, the first word is rejected and the second takes
or the second is rejected and the first takes, according to the
demands of clearness as to the narrative.
دی
o. Biliteral particles may double their second consonant or not,
especially if it is a strong letter.27 The weak may be doubled. Alif
quiescent and may be changed to
ی
9.
,
p. From many nouns Relative Adjectives may be formed having
the termination, implying a certain degree of intensity.
sa
q. Relative Adjectives are always formed from the singular, and
never from the plural, except in the case of certain proper names or
epithets.
أَرْضِي 1- .Examples.
=
10E
earthly, from = earth.
promise, then us. 3.
= a
= عِدَةُ 2
بَرَدَى
حُبَارِيٌّ.
4.
= the ( present) world,
أرض
.
الدنيا .
الدُّنْيَا 8 برد name of a river), and) بَرَدِيَّ
. and عَلْقَى بَاقِلِيُّ and بَاقِلي 6. , 7
two, and
11.
9.
a chair.
= a statute, and
,too = إِثْنَانِ
فَرَضِى.
مَرْمَوِى
43
8.
ន
ម ,
دُنْيِي and or دُنْيَوِى
كُرْسِي 8 عَلْقِيٌّ.
، كُرْسِيُّ
فَرِيضَةٌ
or
dualistic. 10.
613
عَلْقَوِى
43
إِثْنِي
12 . حَقِيق reality, and = حَقِيقَةٌ 13 عَدَوِيٌّ, عَدِيٌّ
= a staff, and
سماء 17.
عَدَوِيٌّ عَصَا 15.
قَرَأَ from قُرَّائِيٌّ
عَدْرَاوِيٌّ
and
= a virgin, and
عَدُّوَةٌ
14.
or
ន
16. عَصَرِيٌّ. .
عَدْرَاءِ 16. =
. سَمَاوِيٌّ or سَمَائِيٌّ 18. سَمَاوِي
قراء
نَدْعُو
E
heaven, and
19. father, and
20 =
نَحْوِى grammar, and =
G
22.
(for
أُبَوِى.
. دموى lileeness, and
دُمَوِيٌّ.
,living = حيى
24 سِقَائِي
= a drinking vessel, and stew.
=
= أن 19.
G
دمية 21
سِقَايَةٌ 3.
حيوى.
and
1
2 63.]
91
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
آری or آئی or آیی
جَزَرِى and الجزيرة
. مَلَكِيٌّ
25. ill
= a king, and
لَمِيٌّ or لَمِّيٌّ
27. J = not, and **J
26.
E. The Abstract Noun of Quality.-1. The Abstract Noun of Quality
is so called as being used to denote the abstract idea of the thing, as
distinguished from the concrete thing itself. It is also used to represent
that which is signified by the primitive noun as a totality.
105
2. The feminine of the relative adjective serves as the form of this
Abstract Noun; thus, & = the divine nature = Godhead, from
10€
.God = ألاله
=
الإلهية
=
F. The Noun Diminutive.-1. The Noun Diminutive, when formed
from a triliteral noun, has the measure 1 When formed from a
9019
Leve?
quadriliteral noun it has the measures
When the noun has five
3
letters, the fourth weak, the measure is If this fourth letter
is strong, the first four letters are employed in forming the Diminutive,
the rest rejected, and the measure is. If among these there are
servile letters, they are also rejected.
2. Diminutives must be formed out of preceding consonants, and ter-
minations for gender, number, etc., added to them.4
3. Proper names consisting of two words form their Diminutive from
the first.
4. A triliteral feminine noun, which has no feminine termination, adds
* to the Diminutive form, provided the primitive noun has no noun of
individuality.5 In the latter case the addition is not made, owing to the
confusion that would result.6
5. In nouns formed from verbs medial radical doubled, the double
consonants are resolved.7
6. If the second radical has been changed, because weak, the original
letter is restored.8
و
9
7. If the second letter is alif servile, or unknown, it is changed to
8. If the third letter is weak it coalesces with the preceding of the
W 10
ي into -ي diphthong
ی
9. In a word of four or more letters, the last two weak, one of the latter
is rejected.11
و
10. The rejected of Infinitives first radical is replaced.12
11. Nouns that have lost their third radical have it restored.13
,,
92
[? 63.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
3G
12. Prosthetic alif of nouns which have lost their third radical is
rejected, and the radical is restored.14
13. The Diminutive form is also used to express both affection15 and
contempt.
Examples.-1. from £
G
= a man.
↓
2.
= a sparrow.
=a
from دريهم درهم
قليعة 4.
رَجُلٌ
عَصْفُورٌ. from عُصْيْفِيرٌ .
dirham.
قَلْعَةٌ from .companions = أَصْحَابُ from أَصَيْحَاب a castle ; and =
1
a
= شَجَرَةٌ but شُجَيْرٌ
= a door,
بوب
for بَابٌ
8.
(f.)
= the sun.
6.
= a hill.
شمس
from شُمَيْسَة ..
S
5.
قَلُّ from خُلَيْلٌ .
·
غُلَيّم
= a poet.
10.
شاعر from
شويعر
,
9.
tree.
and then
بويب.
غُلام from
= an
S
ទ
11.
عُدَتِي for عُدَيٌّ ... عَدُوٌّ from
from يدية 13.
from
693
بنی
= a promise.
$0
= a name.
15.
= a youth.
عِدَةٌ from وَعَيْدَةٌ 12.
اسم from
ورن
سمى
14.
enemy.
.a hand = يَدْ
a son,
ابن
G. Other Noun Forms.-1. Occupations and offices are of the measure
1
? فِعَالَةٌ
2
فَعِيل
:
فعال
2. Sounds are of the measure
فَعِيل and فَعَلَان
3. Motion and emotion are of the measures
فعال Pains of the body are of the measure .4
5 فعال
ه فِعَال
? فِعْلَةٌ
5. Flight and avoidance are of the measure
6. Vessels and implements are of the measure
7. A small portion is of the measure
7
فُعْلَة A small quantity is of the measure .8 ه
ه نُعَالَةٌ Small pieces, as refuse, are of the measure .9
8 64.1
93
AN ARABIC MANUAL
10. Color in the abstract is of the measure
10
11. The instrument by which something is done, and the place in which
S
.11 فَعّالة something is prepared are of the measure
Examples.-1. = office of secretary.
1555 = revolving.
6. = a garment.
لِبَاسٌ
=
2.
= a cry.
3.
=flight.
= صُرَاخ
فرار
4. El = headache. 5.
صُدَاءٌ
.a fragment = کشتر قبضة 8.
7. 8
a handful. 9. = sweepings.
11.
بَرَّادَةٌ
= a stand for cooling water.
10. 8
صُفْرَةٌ
=yellowness.
64. THE GENDERS OF NOUNS.
1. There are two genders, Masculine and Feminine.
2. Nouns that have only one form for both genders are said to be of
the Common gender.
3. A noun is Feminine by signification or by form.
4. The following nouns are Feminine by signification:-
a. Proper names of women, and nouns applicable only to females.1
b. Proper names of towns and countries.2
c. Names of wind, fire and wine.3
d. Names of many parts of the body, especially those that are double.4
e. Collective nouns, especially when they add g to express an indi-
vidual of the species.5
5. Nouns Feminine by form are as follows:-
a. Nouns ending in 8—.6
b. Nouns ending in
or (alif abbreviated), when that termi-
nation does not belong to the root.7
c. Nouns ending in when that termination does not belong to
the root.8
6. Some of the most common nouns that are Feminine by usage are as
302
S
follows: = earth; = a well; &L= a fox;
ارض
تَعْلَبْ
= war;
94
[¿ 64.
AN ARABIO MANUAL.
:
رحى
= دار دلو ;a house =
95 = a bucket;
S
;marleet = سُوق ;a mill = شمس
فاس ; a scorpion = فردوس ;am aate =
30-0
عقرب
bow;
= a staff;
= sun; la
عصا
قوس Paradise کاش ;a bone =
نعل ;a cup = نفس ;a sandal =
كاس
= an oath.
يَمِينٌ
soul;
7. Nouns of the Common gender are as follows ::
a. Collective nouns connected with 4. e, which are Masculine by
form, but Feminine by signification.
b. The names of the letters of the alphabet. They are generally
regarded as Feminine.
c. Words regarded merely as such.
d. A number of nouns of which the following are the most common:
= حَالٌ ; wing = جِنَا
F
سين
;breast = تَدَى ;human being, beings =
بَشَرٌ
S
; shop = دان ;state, condition ;path = سَبيل ;spirit = روح
= power, dominion ;
سلاح Tanifes
Icnife;
سلام صِرَاط barley = شعير : heaven = سَمَا ;ladder = سُلَّم
;
سُلْطَان weapon, peapons
شَعِيرٌ
;
309
عرس
pectce ;
صُلح ; way, road = طريق ;peace = عسل ;wedding
; tongue = لِسَان ; ship = فلك ; horse =
!=
G
فرس
neck;
= salt.
S
سلم
way;
عنق ;honey =
;night = لَيْلٌ
8. The Feminines of Masculine nouns are formed as follows:-
a. By adding
become ( .10
to the Masculine noun.9
ی
and before 8
6. Nouns of the forms make their Feminines in 11 But
those of
C.
G
فعلى
and make their Feminines as usual in 8.
when it expresses the comparative or superlative makes its
.12 فعل Feminine in
d.
when it is descriptive of color or deformity makes its Fem-
13 فَعْلَا inine
2 65.]
95
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
i
فَعُول
when it has the signification of
has no different form
But with the signification of
for the Feminine.
in the Feminine.15
فَعُولَةٌ
f.js when it has the signification
for the Masculine and Feminine.16 But
مفعول
makes
has only one form
with the signification of
ـل
elé makes
in the Feminine.17
g. The other forms of the intensive nouns
مفْعِيل and مِفْعَالُ مِفْعَلْ
being also nouns of instrument, do not take the Feminine termination,
save in a very few exceptions.
Examples.—1. ~= Mary, and *† = mother. 2.
S
=
♫
wind, J = north wind, " = fire,
,hand = ید
13
جنة 6.
سن
tooth. 5.
= a garden. 7.
مصر
107
= Egypt. 3.
= wine.
4.
حَمَامَةٌ pigeon = حَمَام
بَغْضَاءُ 8.
S
فتاة ,ca youth
=
.a pigeon = حَمَامَة ,pigeon =
= a
.good news = بشرى بُشْرَى
فتى 10.
G
9.
.joy = فَرحَةٌ فَرِح
.thirsty = عَطْشَى عَطْشَانُ 11 كُبرى أكبر 12. أَكْبَرُ
=a
رَجُلٌ صَبُور
,
.red = حَمْرَا أَحمر 13.
"
14.
a patient woman. 15. J
رَسُولَة, رَسُولٌ
ة قتيل ,a murdered man إِمْرَأَةٌ قَتِيل
= a helper.
=
إمرا
اة
صبور
hatred.
young girl.
= greatest.
patient man,
= messenger.
S ,
SE
رَجُلٌ قَتِيل 16. =
نَصِيرَةٌ نَصِيرٌ 7.
a murdered woman.
1
65. THE NUMBERS OF NOUNS.
1. There are three numbers; the Singular, Dual and Plural.
2. The Dual is formed by adding
(fem.) to the Singular.¹
In construction, or when followed by an affixed pronoun, the is dropped.
3. If the Singular ends in 8, the 8, with two exceptions, is changed
2. ت into
4. In triliteral nouns ending with abbreviated alif, the original radical
must be restored in forming the Dual.3 If the Singular is a quadriliteral
noun, the
.4 و is retained, though the original radical may be
ي
96
[ 65.
!
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
5. If the termination is the sign of the feminine, then hamza,
ی
or may be employed in forming the Dual. The form with is the
,
most common.5
6. If the termination is added to the root without being a sign of
the feminine, it may be changed or left unchanged.6
7. If the termination is substituted for a radical or
may or may not be made.7
change into
the
, S,
8. If the hamza of gis radical, it cannot be changed to
و
9.8
9. An elided third radical is frequently restored.9
སྙད
•
10. The Plural is formed either by affixes or by a modification of the
original form of the Singular. There are, therefore, two kinds of plurals,
called the Sound Plural and the Broken Plural.
11. The Sound Plural is so called because all the vowels and conso-
nants of the Singular are retained in it. It has but one form.
12. The Broken Plural is so called because it is more or less altered
from the Singular by the addition or elision of consonants, or the change
of vowels. It has, therefore, different forms.
13. The Sound Plural of masculine nouns is formed by adding the
termination to the Singular.10 The Sound Plural of feminine
nouns which end in is formed by expanding into 11 (in the
سُونَ
S
S
ات
oblique cases); and of those which do not end in -, by adding
G
to the Singular.
14. The Sound Masculine Plural is affixed only to the following:-
a. Proper names of men, provided they consist of a single word,
and do not end in 8.
1. Diminutives of proper names which are subject to rule α, and
diminutives of ordinary nouns, provided they denote rational beings, and
are of the Masculine gender.12
c. Nouns of a participial form, or verbal adjectives, making their
feminine in 8, and denoting rational beings.
provided they have the comparative
d. Nouns of the measure
G
43
e. Relative adjectives ending in
or superlative meaning.
يبي
15. To the above rules the following words form exceptions:
90€
ذُو أَهْلُونَ
+
ابن
son, pl. ~,; Åšƒ = family, pl. ¿‚¿šƒ; ‚¿ = possessor, pl. ¿5,
3,
but used only in the construct state,;; = world, universe, of
Ilé
2 65.]
97
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
created beings, pl. ¿Íé; = earth, pl. ; = ten,
=
:
أرض
أرضُونَ
عشر
pl., and the other cardinal numbers, thirty, forty, etc., between
twenty and ninety; & a year, pl., and all nouns similar to
this last, i. e., nouns of which the last radical is cut off and a compensa-
tive added. A peculiarity of this class of plurals last mentioned is
that, in the dependent case they may be treated as Broken Plurals, and
declined throughout.13
16. When the last letter of a noun is weak
ي,,,
ور
or the rules for the
change in the termination of the Imperfect of defective verbs must be
applied.14
17. In construction with a following noun the Sound Plural loses its
final.
فَعْلَةٌ
18. In the formation of the Sound Feminine Plural, nouns of the form
remove the sukoon and point the second radical like the first,
making the Plural. If the second radical is weak, or if the
second and third radicals are alike, or if the noun is an adjective, the
sukoon remains. If the last radical is weak, sukoon may remain or the
letter be pointed with fatḥa. This change must not be made if the first
radical has damma or kesra. Nouns substantive of the form make
S
S
فعلات and sometimes, for the sake of euphony, فعلا their Plural
If the weak letter is
S
ري
damma must not be employed. Nouns substan-
tive of the form make their Plural, whether Singular
or Plural, becomes 3 when followed by a vowel. when in construc-
tion, becomes in the genitive or dependent case.
4t
¿Ĩ,
19. The Sound Feminine Plural is affixed to the following:-
a. Proper names of women, and such names of men as end in —.
b. Feminine adjectives, the masculine gender of which has the
Sound Plural.
c. Feminine nouns in and 3.
d. The names of the letters, generally feminine.
e. The names of the months.
f. Feminine verbal nouns, and all verbal nouns of the derived forms.
g. Substantives of foreign origin even when they denote persons.
h. Many masculine substantives which have no Broken Plural, and
feminine nouns destitute of a feminine termination.
98
[ 65.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
1
i. Verbal adjectives which are employed in the Plural as sub-
stantives.
j. All diminutives except those falling under 14. v.
k. Frequently in nouns having a neuter sense.
20. The Broken Plurals are of two kinds, viz., the Plural of Paucity,
and the Plural of Multitude.
21. The Plural of Paucity expresses any number between three and
ten. The Plural of Multitude denotes any number from ten to infinity,
22. Where only one Plural form exists, it is necessarily common to
both; but most nouns have two or more forms. When a Plural of such
a noun is required, it is generally formed on the measure of the Sound
Feminine Plural by adding K.
S
23. The Sound Plural and the Plural of Paucity denote several indi-
viduals, while the Broken Plural denotes rather the whole class.
24. There are four measures of the Plural of Paucity, as follows:-
Plural.
Meaning.
Foot.
Youth.
Dress.
Load.
Singular.
أرجل
رجُلٌ
أفعل
غلْمَةٌ
غَلَامٌ
فعْلَة
اكسية
كِسَاءُ
أَنْعِلَةٌ
أَحْمَالُ
ii
أفعال
Measure.
S
E و
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Number (3) only occurs in words which have the penultimate a long
vowel. Number (4) is common to Plurals of Multitude also. Numbers
(1) and (4) may have a second Plural formed from them on the ordinary
. أَفَاعِيلُ and أَفَاعِلُ . .measure of quadriliterals, i
e.,
25. Nouns implying multitude, if they have not a Singular,15 and Plu-
ral nouns, when the Singular is not distinguished by 8, are called Ana-
logues of the Plural.
26. Broken Plurals are treated as feminine.
27. There are three different methods employed in the formation of
Broken Plurals, as follows:—
a. By the insertion of an additional letter among the original letters
of the Singular.1
16
b. By the rejection of a letter.17
c. By changes of the vowels.18
28. Some Singular nouns may have their Plurals formed according to
different measures, broken and sound. A single Plural measure may be
? 65.]
99
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
the measure of nouns having various measures in the Singular. In the
following table are given most of the forms of the Broken Plurals, the
principal forms of the corresponding Singulars, together with examples
and meanings ---
1.
Measure
of Plural.
Measures of Principal Singulars.
أَنْعَلُ fem. of فُعْلَى فُعْلَةٌ فَعَل
Singular Plural
of
of
Example. | Example.
Meaning.
§ 1
as a
صورة
Form.
صور
2.
3.
4.
superlative.
C
especially
from verbs medial radical,.
أَحْمَرُ
أَفْعَلُ fem. of فَعْلَاءِ and أَفْعَلُ فعل
not comparative or superlative.
فَعَال
and els derived from
verbs medial radical
9.
609
تعَال فعل not فَعَال كتاب not derived from doubled
كُتُب
فَعِيلَةٌ فَعِيل .or defective verbs
and 3,23 not derived
not derived from de-
fective verbs.
فَعُولُ and فَعِيل
verbal adjectives destitute of a
passive signification, and not de-
rived from defective verbs. Jes,
فَاعِل فَعَلَةٌ
فَعَلَةٌ فِعْلَةٌ فِعَلْ
rare.
rare.
قِطَعْ قِطْعَةٌ
Red.
Book
Piece.

Sea بِحَارُ بَحْرٍ
S
5.
first and second radical not فَعل فعال .
G
,rare فعلة . فعل and فعلي .
not de فَعَلَةٌ and فَعَل : فُعْلَةٌ
rived from doubled, or defective
فعْلَة :fem فعل فَعُل verbs
فُعْلٌ
100
[% 65.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
Measure
of Plural.
Measures of Principal Singulars.
Singular
of
Plural
of
Meaning.
Example. | Example.
فَعْلَى . فعل verbal adjectives فَعَلْ
تُعْلان not fem. superlatives
.verbal adjectives فَعْلَانَةٌ .fem
verbal adjec فَعْلَى .fem فَعْلان
verbal فَعِيلَةٌ .fem فَعِيل tives
adjectives destitute of passive
meaning. verbal adjec-
tives.
Soul نُفُوسٌ نَفْسٌ فَعَلَةٌ and فِعْلَةٌ فَعَل فِعْلُ فعول
6.
فُعُول .
rare.
Je verbal adjectives not
from doubled or hollow verbs.
-Pros سُجَّدٌ سَاجِد verbal adjectives, rarely فَاعِل فعل .
trating
oneself.
S
فاعلة .from defective verbs
fem. of preceding.
7.
.Judge حكام حاکم verbal adjectives, rarely فَاعِل فعال ..
from defective verbs.
.Perfect كَمَلَةٌ كَامل | verbal adjectives, denoting فَاعِل فَعَلَةٌ .
.Judge قُضَاةٌ قَاضِ
rational beings, not from de-
fective verbs.
9.
verbal adjectives, denoting فَاعِل فُعَلَة 100
rational beings, derived from de-
fective verbs.
G
.not from defective verbs فَعل فعَلَة 11 .Branch غِصَنَةٌ غُصْن .not from defective verbs
SE
.Brother إخوة أخ
إِخْوَةٌ
.
فَعِيل فَعَالُ فَعَل فِعْلَة 1.2.
and not from hollow
.Soul أنفُس نَفس not from hollow
rare. Feminine
.
E و
فعل أفعل
فَعَلَة .verbs
13.
? 65.1
101.
AN ARABIC MANUAL..
Measure
of Plural.
Measures of Principal Singulars.
Singular
of
Example.
Plural
of
Example.
Mean-
ing.
quadriliterals, not ending in 8
,
and having a long vowel between
second and third radicals.
بَاب فَعْل .Triliterals of all forms أفعال 14
Door أبواب
forms.es $15
from hollow verbs, and verbs first
فَاعِل . و radical
rare.
فَعِيل
ver-
bal adjectives, destitute of pass-
ive meaning, rare.
15. Quadriliterals having antepenult Wing.
أَجْنِحَةٌ جَنَا-
جناح أن
letter long vowel. Jus derived
from doubled or defective verbs.
Land
and je
rare.
فعل
خَاتَم فَاعِل .substantives فَاعِلٌ فَاعَل فَوَاعِلُ 16. .Ring خَوَاتِمُ خَاتَم
.Cloud سَحَائِبُ سَحَابَةٌ |
Neigh-
bor.
جِيرَانْ
وا
ـاز
verbal adjectives, of men, rare.
Å verbal adjectives, of wom-
فَاعِل
.substantives and fem فاعلة
en.
فاعلاء .verbal adjectives
17. Feminine quadriliterals.
فعل . و from medial radical فَعَل فِعْلَان 18.
rare.
rare.
9.
فَعَالُ فَعّل rare
فعال
فَاعِل and فَعَلَانْفَعِيل
-not diminu فُعَيْلَةٌ and فعل
Roof سُفْفَانٌ سَقْفٌ فَعِيل .
rare.
tives, rare.
فِعَالُ . فَعَل فِعْلٌ فُعْلَان 19.
Lelé verbal adjectives, used as
102
[2 65.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
Measure
Measures of Principal Singulars.
of Plural.
substantives, not from hollow
Singular
of
Plural | Meaning.
of
Example. | Example.
فَعْلَاء .fem أَفْعَلُ verbs
verbal adjectives, used of فَعِيل فَعَلاء 20
rational beings, destitute of pass-
ive meaning, and not from doub-
فاعل .led or defective verbs
some masculine adjectives, sub-
ject to same limitations.
.Poor | فقراء
فَقِير
Rela-
tive.
masculine adjectives, same فَعِيل أَفعلا . أَقْرِبَاءُ قَرِيبٌ
kind as 20, mostly from doubled,
hollow or defective verbs.
icle مَرْضَى مَرِيضٌ verbal أَفْعَلُ فَاعِلٌ, فَعِل فَعِيل فَعْلَى 22
Sick.
,
adjectives, expressing bodily or
mental injuries, defects, etc.
Á verbal adjectives.
Virgin.
عَذَارٍ عَدْرَاء فِعْلِيَةٌ فِعْلَاةُ فَعْلَى فَعْلَاء فَعَال 23.
,
فعلوة
.virgin عَذَارَى عَدْرَاء - femin فُعْلَى فَعْلَى فَعْلَاءِ فَعَالَى 24. .
ine adjectives not superlatives.
فَعْلَى feminine فَعْلَانُ فِعْلِيَةٌ
S
and verbal adjectives.
فَعُلٌ
verbal adjectives.
fem. substantives from defective
,
from defective فَعَالَة .verbs
from defective فاعلة verbs
فَاعِلَةٌ
verbs and verbs medial radical
9.
2 65.]
103
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
Measure
of Plural.
Measures of Principal Singulars.
Singular Plural Meaning.
of
of
Example. Example.
عَبِيدٌ عَبْد .Slave | عبيد
Hus-
.band بُعُولَةٌ بَعْل
.Stone حِجَارَةً حَجَرٌ
.Circle حَلَقٌ حَلْقَةً
ف
G
نَصْرٌ نَاصِرٌ
pra's Helper.
. فَاعِلٌ فِعَالُ فَعَل فَعِيل 25.
. فَعَل فُعُولة 26
فَاعِل فَعَل فِعَالَة 27 .
. فَاعِل فَعَلَةٌ فَعَل 28 .
. فَاعِل فَعل 29
29. The Plural measures 25-29 are rare.
30. The Sound Plural denotes several individuals; the Broken Plural
denotes the whole class.19
31. When a word has several meanings in the Singular, it generally has
a different form of Broken Plural for each.20
32. The measures 12, 13, 14 and 15, as measures of the Plural of
Paucity, are used only of persons and things which are not less than
three or more than ten in number, unless this is the only form of Plural
in use for a certain noun, in which case there can be no such limitation.
33. The Broken Plural forms of quadriliteral and quinqueliteral nouns
are as follows:-
اما
Measure
of Plural.
Measures of Principal Singulars.
Singular of
Example.
Plural of Meaning.
Example.
1.
Di دَرَاهِمُ
Dir-
ham.
دَرَاهِمُ دِرْهَمْ . فَعْلَلُولُ . فَعْلَلَةٌ فِعْلَلْ فَعَالِلٌ 1
فَاعَل فَعَبْدُلَةٌ فَعْلَلِيل
.
فَاعِلٌ
2.
.Finger أصَابِعُ إِصْبَعَ used أَفْعَلُ أَنْعَلْ إِنْعَل أَفَاعِلُ .
Trial تَجَارِبُ تَجْرِبَةٌ
substantively.
. تَفْعِلَةٌ تَفَاعِلُ .
3.
معيشة In plurals of nouns . مَفْعِلَةٌ مَفَاعِلُ . -Liveli مَعَايِشُ مَعِيشَةً
hood.
from verbs medial radical
ري
Y):
ی
resumes its consonantal
104
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
[ 65.
Singular of
Example.
Plural of
Example.
Mean-
ing.
Measure
of Plural.
Measures of Principal Singulars.
power, not changing to ham-
za. A few in follow same
,
rule. There are a few excep-
not a noun of Sultan,
سلاطين
مَفْعَل .tions.
43
. فُعْلَان فَعَالِيلُ .
سُلطان فُعْلِي
فعيل .relation
. تَفْعِيل تَفَاعِيلُ 6
6.
تصاوير تصوير
Power.
Pic-
ture.
Key.
Fount-
ain.
مَفَاتِيحُ مِفْتَاحٌ . مَفْعُولٌ ، مِنْعِيلٌ ، مِفْعَالُ مَفَاعِيلُ . . 7
يَنَابِيعُ يَنبوع
S
.Spy جَوَاسِيسُ جَاسُوس
8.
. يَفْعُولُ يَفَاعِيلُ 8
فَاهُولُ قَوَاعِيلُ .
9.
.Angel مَلَائِكَةٌ مَلَأَنْ يَعْلُولُ . فَيْعَل أَفْعُلُ. فَعْلَلْ فَعَالِلَةٌ 10. .
. مَفْعِليُّ فَيْعَلُولُ فِعْلِيل
,
تعال فَعْلَالى فِعَلَى مُفَعَلى
34. Plurals of Plurals may be formed in the measure of quadriliterals
and quinqueliterals.21 Or a Regular Plural may be formed from the
Broken Plural, but it must be a feminine Plural.22
35. Irregular Plurals formed from Singulars obsolete and other than
أُمَّهَاتُ .those to which they are referred are as follows : - * = mother, pl
.roater, pl = م ; فول as if from
ز
اخواه
امهة
as if from ;= mouth, pl. 8,
↑ E
E
as if from
sol, so as if from 8. The two following are also irregular, viz.:-
نسَاءِ - إِنْسَانَ : أنس from radical نِسْوَان and نِسْوة .women, pl =
man, pl.
(rare and poetic) and.
36. From relative adjectives a Collective Plural may be formed by
adding the feminine termination 8.2
23
2 66.]
105
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
= a
du.
a book, nation, du = كتاب .Examples 1 -
كِتَابَا ن ا امة 2.
.a
du
عَصَو for) عَمَّا 3 امتان
فَتَى (for فَتَى عَصَوَانِ . a staff = )
fromé
09
أمَتَانِ
for رَضِيَ made contented from = مرضی 4 . يا a youth, du =
حَمْرَاوَانِ or حَمْراء ان red d = حمراء .
حَمْرَاءَانِ
du.
5.
عِلْبَاوَانِ
neck, du. lilis
or
= a sinew in the
مُرْضَيَانِ رَضِ.
du.
or
حَمْرَايَانِ :
عِبَاءِ .
) .
كِسَاوَانِ or کساء ان .dires, du = کسو) نِسَاء عِلْبَاءَانِ
du.
G
9.
du.
رَامِيَانِ . رامي 9 قراء ان from ) = to read, d) . قُرًا
قُرَّاء
قَرَأَ
. سَارِقُونَ .a thief, pl =
سَارِقٌ
a little man, (dim. of
10.
12
أَخْوَانِ.
GE
. سنينا .Ac0,سنين
15.
brother, du.
pl.
pl.
سارقان سارقة 11
Dep سنين Nom 13 رجيلُونَ .
ارَجُلٌ
= قاض 14. . قَاضِينَ and اون .a judge, pl = ,tribe = قوم .
= an apostle,
= رَسُول
9.
17.
a man, pl.
جَالٌ
.
مج و
رَجُلٌ
= أَسَد 18. ,slaves = عَبْدُونَ 19 أسد .a lion, pl = اسل
20.
عَبِي
people.
16.
pl. Juj.
viewed individually, and slaves, viewed collectively.
= servants (of God), i. e., men. 21. &
يَدْ
عِبَاد slaves = عَبِيدٌ
E
22 أَيَادِي أَيَادِ .hands, pl. of pl = أَيْدُ) أَيْدِيَدْ
road, ple = طريق
pl
شَافِعِي 23.
Shafiite, col. pl.
the Shafiite sect.
66. THE FORMATION OF PLURALS.
The letters used in the formation of Plurals are the same as those
which are used in the formation of states or tenses, viz., those compos-
ing the word. These letters, the long vowels, and the tashdeed, or
doubling of a consonant, are all the augmentatives employed. They are
strictly analogous in usage and signification, both in nouns and verbs; for
just as they modify the action of a verb in a manner corresponding to the
modification of the form, so they modify the nature of a noun.
106
[ 67.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
The two principal ideas which operate in the outset in the formation
of Plurals are- First, the addition of one or more letters to express an
addition to the sense, as in the case of verbs; Second, the marking of the
distinction between Singular and Plural.
The next thing that operates largely in the formation of Plurals is the
nature of the vowels employed, as a careful examination of all the forms
will show, as also the development of various derivatives from certain
given roots. In the measures of Broken Plurals, as in the measures of
the verbs, the vowels are the characteristic and most important part of
the form; and they will, in consequence, exert their usual power over a
weak letter. An example may be taken from quadriliterals.
The measure for the Plurals of quadriliterals may be regularly repre-
sented thus
, which will be found to include all the forms
下
​Take as an example the word
مِفْتَاحُ
G
= to open.
may be represented thus مفتاح
.etc مَفَاعِلُ فَعَاعِلُ فَوَاعِلُ
فَتَحَ
a key, from
Ľ
Now, according to the rule for the formation of Broken
Plurals from quadriliteral nouns represented above, this noun should
2
二​二
​make its Plural thus ———, that is,
ll. But the vowel
kesra is the most important form to preserve, and therefore it changes
the ↑ into the vowel-letter homogeneous with itself, viz., S; and therefore
the Broken Plural of the noun in question must be
the case.
مَفَاتِيحُ
which is
The position of any of the three radicals in the form is immaterial.
For example, from
S
جوهر
= a gem, we have the Broken Plural according
to the rule given, where the first radical
pies the first place, while in
مَفَاتِيحُ
occu-
the first radical occupies the
second place.
67. THE DECLENSIONS OF NOUNS.
1. Nouns are either definite or indefinite.
2. An indefinite noun is indicated by tenween.
3. An indefinite noun is made definite by prefixing the definite article,
or by placing it in construction with another and following noun, or by
the addition of a pronominal affix.
4. Nouns are classified into two declensions, according as they have
three or two terminations in the singular to indicate the different cases.
1
:
8 67.]
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
107
Those having three terminations constitute the First Declension, and
those having two the Second Declension.
5. The cases are indicated by the three short vowels or their tenweens.
The tenween indicates an indefinite noun; the short vowel a definite
noun.
6. Nouns have three cases, viz., Nominative, Accusative and Depend-
ent (Genitive, Dative and Ablative).
7. The cases of indefinite nouns of the First Declension are indicated
as follows:-
Nom.
Dep.i
Acc. or.
8. The cases of definite nouns of the Second Declension are indicated
as follows:-
Nom. ;
Dep. and Acc. —.
9. The dual has only two case endings, common to both genders, as
follows:-
;-ان .Nom
Dep. and Acc.
10. The sound plural has also only two case endings for each gender,
as follows:-
Masc. Nom. ;
نسُونَ
Dep. and Acc.
2
ين
Fem. Nom. ;
Dep. and Acc. ~|-.
11. The broken plurals have either two or three case endings, after the
manner of the singular.
12. The declension of indefinite nouns of the First Declension is as
follows:
f
Substantives.
S
Common. Masculine.
= رَجُلٌ
= a man.
Dual.
Broken Plural.
Singular.
Nom.
رَجُلٌ
رجلان
Dep.
Acc. 5)
رجالا
رَجُلَيْنِ
رجال
رِجَال
r
108
[8 67.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
Singular.
جنة .Nom
جنة .Dep
1
جنة .Acc
Singular.
I w
Common. Feminine. a garden.
جنة
Dual.
Sound Plural.
Broken Plural.
جِنَّانٌ
جَنَّاتٌ
جَنَّتَانِ
13
جنَّانٍ
جَنَّاتٍ
جَنَّتَينِ
جنانا
Proper. Masculine. ) = Zaid.
Dual.
زید
Sound Plural.
Broken Plural.
G
زيود
زيدُونَ
زَيْدَانِ
زيد .Nom
زيود
زَيدِينَ
زيد Dep
زُبُودًا
زيدين
زيدًا .Acc
Singular.
هند
Proper. Feminine. = Hind.
Dual.
Sound Plural.
Broken Plural.
هنود
هنَدَاتٌ
مِنْدَانِ
هند .Nom
عنود
هند Dep.
هنَدَاتِ
هنْدَيْنِ
هُنُودًا
هندا .Acc
Singular.
Adjectives.
Masculine.
Dual.
جَالِسٌ
sitting.
Sound Plural.
Broken Plural.
جلاس
جَالِسُونَ
جَالِسَانِ
جالس .Nom
جَالِسٌ
جلاس
جَالِس Dep.
جَالِسِينَ
جَالِسَيْنِ
جُلاسًا
جالسًا ..
2 67.]
109
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
Singular.
.mourning = نَائِحَةُ .Feminine
t
Dual.
Sound Plural.
Broken Plural.
G W
نوح
نَائِحَاتْ
نَائِحَتَانِ
نائحة .Nom
نائحة .Dep
نَائِحَاتٍ
نَائِحَتَيْنِ
نَاحَةً .Acc
نُوحًا
13. Nouns of the Second Declension are those which have only two ter-
minations for the cases in the singular; viz., Nom. Dep. and Acc. —.
The declension is as follows:-
Substantives.
Singular.
Dual.
Plural.
Masc.
Othman.
Fem. Masc.
Fem.
Masc. Fem.
Zainab.
زَيْنَبَاتٌ عُثْمَانُونَ زَيْنَبَانِ عُثْمَانَانِ زَيْنَبُ عُثْمَانُ
Nom.
زَيْنَبَاتٍ عُثْمَانِينَ زَيْنَبَيْنِ عُثْمَانَيْنِ زَيْنَبَ عُثْمَانَ .Dep. and Acc
Broken Plural.
Nom.
. . مَفَاتِيحَ : دَرَاهِمَ .Dep and Acc ; مَفَاتِي دَرَاهِم
Adjectives.
Singular.
Dual.
Sound Plural.
Masc.
Fem. Masc.
Fem.
Masc.
Fem.
More Excellent.
Black.
أَفْضَلُونَ سَوْدَاوَانِ أَفْضَلَانِ سَوْدَاءِ أَفْضَلُ
Nom.
أَفْضَلِينَ سَوْدَارَيْنِ أَفْضَلَيْنِ سَوْدَاء أَفْضَلَ .Dep. and Acc
.and
Broken Plural.
Fem.
Mourning.
Masc.
.poor = فقير
نَوَائِحُ
فقراء
ترائِحَ
فُقَرَاء
Nom.
Dep. and Acc.
110
[% 67.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
14. The following nouns belong to the First Declension :-
a. Nouns derived from a verb (except
beings; as, fem.
G
like common substantives in 12.
) and denoting rational
= a sinner, from ~53 = to sin, declined
b. Adjectives, and usually substantives, of the form fem.
أَرْمَلَةُ .fem
as
أَرْمَلٌ له : أَفْعَلَةٌ
= poor, declined as in 12.
and those of the فَعْلَانَةٌ .fem فَعْلَان Adjectives of the form .
C
نَدْمَانَةٌ .fem نَدْمَان as ; فُعْلَان form
repentant, declined as in 12.
d. Broken plurals except those of the form --=====
2
ی
or ; as
and those ending in
$
Pl. Nom. Al
|==,=,
Dep. Acc. f = lions.
اسد
اسدا
二​二​,
e. Proper names consisting of three letters, the second of which
201
has sukoon, or is a letter of prolongation; as,,
declined as in 12.
= Noah,
f. Proper names of men having an intelligible signification in
Arabic; as Muhammad =
مُحَمَّد
=
Praised, declined as in 12, thus
Acc.
.etc مُحَمَّدًا .Aoo مُحَمَّدٍ Dep مُحَمَّدٌ Nom.
15. The following nouns belong to the Second Declension:-
a. Broken plurals of four syllables, the first and second having
fatḥa, the third kesra; declined as in 13 and
دَرَاهِمُ
مَفَاتِيحُ
b. Broken plurals ending in hamza preceded by alif with madda;
declined, Nom., Dep. and Acc. = wise men.
c. Broken plurals ending in
and
as
Sas SP.
d. Common nouns and adjectives ending in hamza, not radical,
and preceded by alif with madda; declined as in 13.
e. Common nouns and adjectives ending in abbreviated alif, not
radical; as
= ذِكْرَى
remembrance; only case ending.
03
ƒ. Adjectives of the form, not making the fem. in ÿ, as
Láš, declined in 13.
ـلُ
8 67.]
111
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
فَعْلَان g. Adjectives of the form
not making the fem. in ; as
8
سَكْرَان
as
h. Distributive or collective numerals from 1 to 4, some say, to 10;
= أحَادُ موحد ones, and = مَوْحَدُ
=
one by one. Also some other words anal-
ogous to these numerical forms; as
other, another :
all,
pl. of
some, etc.
أُخَرُ
- كُتَعُ
أخرى
(fem, of
أَخَرُ
i. Proper names which have been changed from their original form;
J>'; = Sat-
thus = Omar, originally pole = the one who lives, and ¿; -
urn (the planet), originally
زَاحِلٌ
= the one remote or withdrawing.
j. Proper names of more than three letters, or of three letters when
the middle consonant is pointed with a vowel; as
إِبْرَاهِيمُ
Abraham.
k. Proper names ending in abbreviated alif, or alif with madda; as
Sulma,
,Sulma - سُلْمَى
;
Zachariah.
7.
.Solomon = سُلَيْمَانُ as ; - ان Proper names ending in .
E
m. Proper names having a verbal form; as Ahmad.
"
n. Proper names of females not ending ÿ, if they have more than
three letters, or if they have three letters the middle one of which is
pointed with a vowel; as = Zainab. If the middle letter of the
triliteral proper name, fem., has sukoon, it may belong either to the First
زَيْنَبُ
or Second Declension, the former preferable.
o. Proper names ending in g whether masculine or feminine; as
.Fatima = فَاطِمَةُ
16. The existence of a weak letter at the end of a noun will necessarily
affect its case endings.
a. Nouns of the measure from verbs with a final
C
change into . We have then-
in the root
112
[2 67.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
Singular.
Dual.
عَصَوَانِ
عَصَوْ for عَمَّا .Nom
((
عَمَّا .Dep
عَصْبِ
عَصَوَيْن
عَصَوا
فعَلْ
Acc. Lás
b. Nouns of the measure
$
Nom.
Dep.
Acc.
into. We have then—
Singular.
فَنَّى
فتی
c. Nouns ending in
We have them -----
و
or
Plural.
Regular
plural
wanting.
from verbs with a final
Dual.
فتيان
فتيير
ری
y:
Plural.
Regular
plural
wanting.
change
change that termination into
Plural.
Dual.
C
Singular.
for
غَازِوْ قَاضِي for قَاضِ
قَاضُونَ
قَاضِيَانِ
قاضي
قاض
غَازِوِ
قَاضِينَ
قَاضِيَين
،،
غَارِ
غَازِ
Á
غَازِيًا
Nom.
Dep.
Acc.
قَاضِيًا reg فَاضِبًا غَازِيًا regular ايا ..
thus-
d. Nouns ending in g, hamza being radical, are declined regularly,
Nom.
Dep.
Acc.
Singular.
199
31
قُرَّآ
قرأ
Dual.
Plural.
قراون
قُرَّاثِينَ
e. Nouns ending in, this termination being derived from a
final radical
,
or are declined thus-
ري
,
8 67.]
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
113
Dual.
Plural.
Regular
plural
wanting.
كِسَاوَانِ or كِسَاءَانِ
کساء
كسَاءِ
كِسَاوَيْن or كِسَاءيْن
كسَاءَ
Singular.
Nom.
Dep.
Acc.
ی
f. Plurals of the Second Declension, which should end in for
follow in the Nom. and Dep. the First Declension instead of the
Second, and substitute
S
S
for
; thus-
S
Sing. l, Pl. Nom. and Dep. for
جَارِيَةٌ
جَوَارِيَ
Acc.
جوا
جَوَارِيَ
instead of) جَوَارِي
17. An indefinite noun is made definite by prefixing the article, in
which case tenween and final alif of the accusative disappear, and a noun
of the Second Declension assumes the threefold terminations of the First.
We have then-
Sing.
Bk. Pl.
the man
the men
Masc.
the black
Fem.
the black
Fem. Sing.
the city
Fem. Sd. Pl.
the darknesses
الظُّلُمَاتُ الْمَدِينَةُ السَّوْدَاء الْأَسْوَدُ الرِّجَالُ الرَّجُلُ .Nom
الظُّلُمَات
الْمَدِينَةِ السَّوْدَاءِ الأَسْوَدِ الرِّجَالِ الرَّجُلِ Den
الْمَدِينَةَ السَّوْدَاء الْأَسْوَدَ الرِّجَالَ الرَّجُلَ Aoo.
Acc.
18. A noun is also made definite by being placed in construction with
another and following noun. We have then -
Singular.
the boole of God.
I
Plural.
the noonders of creation.
كِتَابُ اللهِ
عَجَائِبُ الْمَخْلُوقَاتِ
كِتَابِ اللَّهِ
عَجَائِبِ الْمَخْلُوقَاتِ
عَجَائِبَ الْمَخْلُوقَاتِ
كِتَابَ الله
Nom.
Dep.
Acc.
When thus in construction with a following noun the dual loses the
termination and the sound plural the termination.
,
114
[% 67.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
19. A noun is also made definite by the addition of pronominal affixes.
With the addition of pronominal affixes the following changes take place:
a. Nouns of the First Declension and the sound fem. pl. lose the
tenween.
b. The dual and sound masc. pl. lose the terminations
and ·
c. Before the affix of the first sing. the final vowels of the sing.,
broken pl., and sound fem. pl. are elided.
….
d. If the noun ends in s, this letter is changed to the original . .
e. If the noun ends in changeable alif or hamza, this letter becomes
before the affixes, when it has ḍamma (Nom.), and
(Dep.). We have then—
Indefinite.
ی
when it has kesra
·
Definite.
With the Article.
With Pronouns.
كتابي
كِتَابِي
کتابی
كِتَابُهُ
كِتَابِهِ
جدا ازل
كِتَابَهُ
الْكِتَابُ
أَلْكِتَابِ
الْكِتَابَ
.a book =کتاب .Nom
is of a book.
= a bool.
كِتَابِ .of = كِتَابِ
Dep.
كتابا .Acc
And further,according to the changes of
=
sons.
Jis = your sons.
بَنُونَ two booles =
بَنُوكَ
كِتَابَانِ
.darkness = ظُلُمَات
كِتَابَالَ ظُلْمَاتُهَا your two = كتاباك (its her =
Rules
a. & b.
S
جنة
جَنَّاتٌ
جَنَّاتِي
Sing. fem.
Sd. Pl.
Sd. Pl.
with affix
كِتَاب Sing
كِتَابٌ
كُتُب
كُتُبِى
Bk. Pl.
Bk. Pl.
with affix
= a favor.
کتابی with aflix
كِتَابِي
Sing.
Rule
Sing.
C.
نعمة
.my favor = نِعْمَنِي
نِسَاوه women; with aflix =
نِسَاء
نسائه
Rule
d.
{
Nom.
Rule
Dep.
e.
نِسَاء Acc., unchanged
2 67.]
115.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
20. A few nouns retain the ancient form of declension when in con-
struction with a following noun or affixed pronoun, although most of
them may be declined in the ordinary manner. These nouns are
SE
GE
أخ
,father = او
possessor,
Indefinite.
Nom.
آب
= brother, *= father-in-law, 3=thing,,3
mouth. Their declension is as follows:
With
Article.
With Pronouns.
In
Construction.
=
Declined ordinarily.
زَيْدٍ أَبِي أَبُوهُ الْأَبُ
آبو زيد
أَبُ زَيْدِ أَبُهُ
E
E
أَبِي زَيْدِ
أَبِ زَيْدٍ أَبِهِ
:
أَبِيهِ الْأَبِ
آیا
زَيْدٍ أَبِي أَبَاهُ الْأَبَ
أَبَهُ أَبَا زَيْدٍ
أَبَا زَيْد أَبَهُ
N.
Dep.
Acc.
. أبَا زَيْد and أَباه .Or they may take alif in all three cases ; as . D. A
فِيَّ or فَمِي فُو زَيْد or قَمُ زَيْد
.هن
,
So with and
or فيه
،،
,
Nom.
Dep.
فِيهِ " فَمِهِ
فِي “ فَمِي
فِي زَيْد " قَمِ زَيْدٍ
،،
فَايَ “ فَمِي
مَا زَيْد " تم زيد
فَاهُ
،،
فمه
,
Acc.
3 is always declined in the ancient manner, thus—
ذُو .Nom ذُو مَال as
Dep. S
Acc.
ذى
،،
ذِي مَال
ذا
ذَا مَال
XIII. The Numerals
68. THE CARDINAL NUMBERS
1. The Cardinal Numbers are as follows:-
Masculine.
1
2
CN
3
+
5
2
3
h
ه
6
۶
7
Ꮩ
8
9
10
۱۰
11
"
124
١٢
13
۱۳
14
۱۴
15
10
16
19
17
۱۷
18
١٨
Feminine.
وَاحِدَةً or إحْدَى
إِثْنَتَانِ
G
ثلث or ثَلَاث
6 - E
اربع
Ꮎ
خَمْسٌ
سر
1993
وَاحِدٌ or أَحَدٌ
إِثْنَانِ
ثَلتَةٌ or ثَلَاثَةٌ
أَرْبَعَةُ
خمسة
ستة
سبعة
تَمُنِيَةٌ or ثَمَانِيَةٌ
سبع
ثَمَانٍ
C
تسعة
تسع
عشر
إِحْدَى عَشْرَةَ
عشرة
أَحَدَ عَشَرَ
X:6
إِثْنَنَا عَشْرَةَ
إِثْنَا عَشَرَ
ثَلَاثَ عَشْرَةَ
ثَلَاثَةَ عَشَرَ
أَرْبَعَ عَشْرَةَ
أَرْبَعَةَ عَشَرَ
خَمْسَ عَشْرَةَ
خَمْسَةَ عَشَرَ
سِتّ عَشْرَةَ
سِتَّةَ عَشَرَ
سَبْعَ عَشْرَةَ
سَبْعَةَ عَشَرَ
ثَمَانِيَ عَشْرَةَ
ثَمَانِيَةَ عَشَرَ
? 68.]
117
AN ARABIC MANUAL.

19
19
20
۲۰
21
۲۱
2273
۲۲
23 ۲۳
30
۳۰
40
۴۰
50
۵۰
60
9.
70
۷۰
80
90
9.
100
۱۰۰
4
200
۲۰۰
300
۳۰۰
1000
۱۰۰۰
Masculine.
Feminine.
تِسْعَ عَشْرَةَ
تِسْعَةَ عَشَرَ
عِشْرُونَ
إِحْدَى وَعِشْرُونَ
أَحَدٌ وَعِشْرُونَ
إنْتَتَانِ وَعِشْرُونَ
إِثْنَانِ وَعِشْرُونَ
ثَلَاثُ وَعِشْرُونَ
ثَلَاثَةٌ وَعِشْرُونَ
فلاتون
9701
اربعون
خَمْسُونَ
ستون
سَبْعُونَ
ثَمَانُونَ
تِسْعُونَ
مائة
مِائَتَانِ
ثَلَاثُ مِائَةٍ
أَلْفُ
2. The numeral two is declined as an ordinary dual noun.
3. From three to ten the numerals assume the feminine form for the
masculine, and the masculine form for the feminine.
4. From three to ten the numerals govern a broken plural of the noun
numbered, which is put in the oblique case.
5. The numerals compounded with ten are indeclinable, both taking
fatḥa in all cases. The ten thus used in the compound follows the ordi-
nary rule for masculine and feminine, while the units reverse it, as in
the rule given above.
118
[? 69.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
6. From eleven to ninety-nine the numerals take an accusative singular
of the thing numbered.
7. Twenty, thirty, etc., are common to both genders, and are declined
like ordinary sound plurals.
8. In compounding numerals with twenty, thirty, etc., and a unit, the
unit is placed first, the two are connected by the conjunction; (= and),
and both are declined.
9. The word ↳ (= hundred) is common to both genders. It is
pronounced as if written Lo
10. From one hundred to a thousand the numerals govern the singular
of the noun numbered, which they put in the oblique case, as
(= a hundred men).
مِائَةُ رَجُلٍ
11. When the hundreds are compounded with units, they are put in
the oblique case of the singular.
.a thousand) is common to both genders = ) ألف 12.
(=
13. Thousands compounded with units follow the rules given above;
that is, they are treated as a thing numbered. Thus, from 3,000 to 10,000
the broken plural is used in the oblique case; from 10,000 to 99,000
the accusative singular is used; and from 100,000 upwards the ob-
lique singular).
=01
69. THE ORDINAL NUMBERS.
1. The Ordinal Numbers for the units (except the first) are formed on
the measure of the agent, masc.
Jelé, fem. el. The tens, hun-
فَاعِلَةٌ فَاعِل
dreds and thousands do not differ from the cardinal numbers. The fol-
lowing is a table of Ordinal Numbers :-

Masculine.
Feminine.
أولى
أَوَّلُ
ثَانِيَةٌ
تَان
W
ثالثة
ثَالث
رَابِعَةُ
رابع
F
خَامِسَةٌ
خامس
1st
2d
за
4th
G
5th
سَابِعٌ
ثَامن
نَاسِعٌ
عَاشِرٌ
سَادِسَة
سَادِش
سَابِعَةٌ
خَامِنَةٌ
Masculine.
Feminine.
6th
\
13 12 12 19
21%3
7th
8th
G
تَاسِعَةٌ
عَاشِرَةٌ
9th
ว
10th
% 70.]
119
AN ARABIC MANUAL.

Masculine.
Feminine.
حَادِيَةَ عَشْرَةَ
حَادِيَ عَشَرَ
قَانِيَةَ عَشْرَةَ
تَانِيَ عَشَرَ
قالت فقر
ثَالِثَةَ عَشْرَةَ
عشرون
حَادِيَةٌ وَعِشْرُونَ
حَادٍ وَعِشْرُونَ
تَانِيَةً وَعِشْرُونَ
قَانٍ وَعِشْرُونَ
قَالقَة وَعِشْرُونَ
ثَالِثُ وَعِشْرُونَ
تسعون
حَادِيَةٌ وَتِسْعُونَ
حَادٍ وَتِسْعُونَ
etc.
70. OTHER NUMERALS.
1. The Adverbial Numerals are formed as follows:-
= once (lit. one time, one turn).
نَوْبَةً or مَرَّةً
مرة or مَرَّةً ثَانِيَةً .twice = ثَانِيَ مَرَّةٍ
or
ةَ ثَالِثَةَ
مر thrice = مَرَّةً خَالِنا
2. The Distributive Numerals are after the following forms:-
= one by one.
two by two.
= مَوْحَدُ or أَحَادُ
إثْنينِ اثْنَين or مَثْنَى or ثُنَاءِ
.three by three = مَثْلَثُ or غُلَانُ
رُبَاعُ
or
,
مربع
four by four.
11th
12th
13th
20th
21st
22d
23d
90th
91st
3. The Multiplicative Numerals are according to the following exam-
ples :-
709
و
.triple, threefold, etc = مُثَلّث .double, toofold = مُتَنى single = مُفْرَد
120
[8 70.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
4. The Adjectival Numerals are of the following forms :-
تتَائِيٌّ
= تلاتي
= dual, consisting of two. treble, consisting of three, etc.
5. The Fractions are-
90
307
= fourth.
ربع
,third = ثُلث half = نصف
= tenth. Above
tenth = عُشر
parts of = أجزاء من part = جزء a tenth fractions are expressed by
6. The Recurring Numerals are-
ثلَّثَ الثلث
sit|| Bis = every third.
↑
ربعًا الربع
every fourth, etc.
7. The Approximate Numeral (= a few) is used with the units
يضع
from three to nine. The Approximate
the tens, hundreds and thousands;
(= a few more) is used with
(= about) and ¿é
مَا يَزِيدُ عَلَى about and = ) نَحْوَ
(= what exceeds) followed by the number.
1
XIV. Separate Particles.
71. PREPOSITIONS.
1. The Separable Prepositions are of two kinds. Those of the first
kind are biliteral or triliteral, and have different terminations. Those of
the second kind are nouns of different forms in the accusative singular,
determined by the following genitive, and therefore end in fatḥa without
tenween.
2. The Separable Prepositions of the first kind are as follows:-
.until, up to, as far as = حتى
: to.
= إِلَى
,upon, open, above = على .from, away from, after, for = عن
في
مَعَ
against.
= in, into, among, about.
with.
عَنْ
لَدَى
لَدُنْ
= من
or = with, by.
of, from, on account of.
.since = مُنْ or مُنْذُ
preserve their original pronunciation before the لَدَى and عَلَى, إلى 3.
affixes; as J. In the affixes of the third person the ḍamma of the
affix changes into kesra after the diphthong. The affix of the first singu-
lar,
لَدَيَّ, عَلَى إِلَى into
ری and لَدَى عَلَى إِلَى combines with في
is doubled in connection with لَدُنْ and مِنْ عَن of
ن
and. The
,
the affixes of the first singular; as
W
.etc عَني
4. Separable Prepositions of the second kind are nouns of different
forms in the accusative singular (1). Examples of these prepositions
are as follows:-
بَيْنَ .between, among = بين
ass=under, beneath, over against.
a = behind, after.
خَلْفَ
.(before (of place = أَمَامَ
.after = بَعْدَ
.round, about = حول
حَوْلَ
122
[% 72.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
= عَنْدَ , عِنْدَ
Mic, Mic = with, in posses- Jos
with, in posses- = instead of, for.
= فَوْقَ
اتم
وَسْطَ
= above.
sion of.
plås = before (of place).
in the midst of, among.
↓ = before (of time).
155 = behind, after.
وَرَاء
These are all construct Accusatives of nouns; such as
35 = circumference, etc.
72. ADVERBS.
G
بين
interval,
1. Adverbs are classified into particles separable and inseparable; inde-
clinable nouns ending in damma; nouns in the Accusative. The insep-
arable adverbial particles have been treated. The principal Separable
Adverbial Particles are as follows:-
E
¿, better
نَعَمْ
إِذًا or إِذَنْ
أَلَا
أَمَا
E
= yes, certainly; confirming a previous statement.
3! = well then, in that case, if it be so.
E
compound of † and ý = not; negative interrogative, or inter-
rogative alternative.
I
= whether, or; alternative of.
أ
compounded of interrogative and ↳ (= not).
5↓ = certainly, surely, verily, truly; joined to the Accusative
of a following noun or pronominal affix. It introduces the
subject, and is frequently followed by J with the predicate.
With 1st sg. affix and.
↓ = only; restrictive; compounded off and L.
E
how?
01
أَيْنَ
انى
?whence = من أين ?where = أين ? hoo ? ohence =
مِنْ أَيْنَ
.wherever = أَيْنَمَا
آی
• E
- that is; explicative.
2 72.]
123
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
MANUAL.
والله followed by the oath إلى = أَيوة yes ; vulgarly = إى
ges;
بل
بَلَى
13
nay, nay rather, not so, on the contrary, but.
yes; in giving affirmative answer to a negative question or
proposition.
*3, in pause = there.
قَدْ
قط
Léé
كَلَّا
already, now; denotes that something uncertain has taken
place, something expected has been realized. It also marks
the position of a past act or event as prior to the present time
or to another past act or event = our Perfect or Pluperfect.
With the Imperfect it means sometimes, perhaps.
= ever, never; always with the Perfect, or Jussive, and a
negative.
=
only, merely, and that is all.
= not at all, certainly not, by no means.
no, not; negative of the Future and indefinite Present, and
a prohibitive particle joined to the Jussive.
* = not; negative of the Perfect, but always joined to the Jus-
لَمْ
sive in the sense of the Perfect. And J = not yet; joined
to the Jussive.
E
J = not, never, not at all; contraction for ; joined to the
لَنْ
لا
Subjunctive.
not; negative of the absolute Present and of the Perfect.
هل ? when
مَتَى
whether? interrogative.
liò, lio, lió here, and Jis there; demonstrative.
2. Adverbs of the second class are indeclinable nouns ending in dam-
ma. The same substantives of which the Accusatives serve as preposi-
124
[8 72.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
tions (8 71. 1, 4) can in general be used as adverbs, in which case they
take the termination 2, and are indeclinable. Examples are as follows :
مِنْ بَعْدُ بَعْدُ مِنْ تَحْتُ تحت afterwards
beneath.
مِنْ فَوْقُ فَوْقُ
above.
مِنْ قَبْلُ قَبْلُ
before.
حيث من حيث ; where = ;whither = إِلَى حَيْثُ : whence
حَيْتُمَا
= wherever.
3. Adverbs of the third class are nouns in the Accusative. Examples
are as follows:-
113
of future time = ever; with a negative = never.
very, very much; placed after an adjective.
أَبَدًا
جدًّا
۱۰
.together, all of you; of two or more = جَمِيعًا
5,65 = outside, without; and 5 = inside, within.
رِجًا
= to the right.
يَمِينًا and
.little = قليلا and
:
= to the left;
much;
شَمَالاً .
= كَثِيرًا
;by night = ليلاً .by day = نَهَارًا and
.now, at present = الآن and
one day, once ;
E
يَوْمًا
;to-duty = اليوم
حَيْنَ
=
when.
غدًا and
- to-morrow.
L₁ = sometimes, perhaps.
Su
سوف whilst, during = ريماري
رَيْتَمَا
,
كيف ,above all = لَاسِبّمَا and سِيمَا
especially.
lit. in the end, with Impf.
denoting real futurity.
= how?
only with pronominal affixes, as he alone.
وَحْدَهُ
{
2 73.]
125
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
73.
CONJUNCTIONS.
1. The principal Separable Conjunctions are as follows:-
¿↓ = when, since; of past time; prefixed to a nominal or verbal
proposition.
ló↓ = when; usually of future time; implying a condition; prefixed
to verbal proposition.
LT, followed by J
E
= as for, as regards.
كان that, so that (at); compounds = أن
= as if, in order
لان =
= لأن
that, because, etc.
.verily if, etc = لين although; compounds = وَإِن ;if = إن
ان
= that (quod); followed by a noun or pronominal affix in the Acc.
$ = except, unless; with a preceding negative only.
H
أو
or.
*3= then, thereupon; connecting words and clauses; implying
succession at interval.
= till, until, until that; same as the preposition.
لگی compoundگی
—
and compound in order that; assigning a reason.
~and~= but, yet;
affixes in the Acc.
WJ = when, after; with the Perf.
=if; hypothetical particle.
only before nouns and pronominal
ما
= so long as; denoting duration; with the Perf.
{
126
[8 74.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
74. INTERJECTIONS.
1. Many words used as interjections are strictly verbs or nouns. Inter-
jections proper are indeclinable. Of these the principal ones are—
H
E
E
O! ho! Lol, ogl
ah!
all alasl = وَهَا وَ أَو أَوْ أَهَا أَ O o = أَيَا أَي , or 1
lo! see there! =
هَلْمٌ ! woe = وَيْلٌ, وَ come here = وَى
وا
يَا أَيُّهَا or أَيُّهَا before nouns in the No. or Acc without, and یا
before nouns in the Nom. with, the article 0!
PARADIGMS.
128
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
PARADIGM A. SIMPLE FORM, STRONG VERB, ACTIVE VOICE.
Imperfect.
2d Energ.
Subj.
Jussive.
1st Energ.
Indic.
Perfect.

. 3 .Sing | قَتَلَ يَقْتُلُ يَقْتُلَ
،،
3 f.
(6 2 m.
،،
،،
2 f.
1 c.
يَقْتُلُ يَقْتُلَ يَقْتُل يَقْتُلَنَّ يَقْتُلَن
قَتَلَتْ تَقْتُلُ تَقْتُلَ تَقْتُلْ تَقْتُلَنَّ تَقْتُلَن
قَتَلْتَ تَقْتُلُ تَقْتُلَ تَقْتُلُ تَقْتُلَنَّ تَقْتُلَن
قَتَلْتِ تَقْتُلِينَ تَقْتُلِي تَقْتُلِي تَفْتُلِنَّ تَقْتُلِن
قَتَلْتُ أَقْتُلُ أَقْتُلَ أَقْتُلْ أَقْتُلَنَّ أَقْتُلَن
E و
.3 Dual قَتَلَا يَقْتُلَانِ يَقْتُلَا يَقْتُلَا يَقْتُلَانِ
قَتَلَنَا تَقْتُلَانِ تَقْتُلَا تَقْتُلَا تَقْتُلَانِ
،،
3 f.
2 c.
m.
แ
\
قَتَلْتُمَا تَقْتُلَانِ تَقْتُلَا تَقْتُلَا تَقْتُلَانِ
. 3 .Plur قَتَلُوا يَقْتُلُونَ يَقْتُلُوا يَقْتُلُوا يَقْتُلُنَّ يَقْتُلُن
قَتَلْنَ يَقْتُلْنَ يَقْتُلْنَ يَقْتُلْنَ يَقْتُلْنَان




66 3 f.
2 m.
2 f.
،،
،،
،،
1 c.
قَتَلْتُمْ تَقْتُلُونَ تَقْتُلُوا تَقْتُلُوا تَقْتُلُنَّ تَقْتُلُن
قَتَلْتُنَّ تَقْتُلْنَ تَقْتُلْنَ تَقْتُلْنَ تَقْتُلْنَان
قَتَلْنَا نَقْتُلُ نَقْتُلَ نَقْتُلْ نَقْتُلَنَّ نَقْتُلَن
2d Energ.
1st Energ.
Imperative.
Simple.
090
اقتل
اقتلی
اقتلا
اقْتُلُوا
افتلن
قَاتل
قَاتِلَةٌ
و
أقتلن
و
و
أقتلن
أُقْتُلِنَّ أُقْتُلِن
أُقْتُلَانٌ
و
و
أَقْتُدُنَّ أَقْتُلُن
W
أقتلنان
Infinitive.
قتل
Sing. 2 m.
،،
2 f.
Dual 2 c.
Plur. 2 m.
،،
2 f.
Participle.
Sing. m.
،،
f.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
129
PARADIGM B. SIMPLE FORM, STRONG VERB, PASSIVE VOICE.

Imperfect.
Perfect.
2d Energ.
Jussive.
1st Energ.
Subj.
Indic.
m.
،،
66
3 f.
2 m.
2 f.
. 3 .Sing قُتِلَ يُقْتَلُ يُقْتَلَ يُقْتَلْ يُقْتَلَنَّ يُقْتَلَن
قُتِلَتْ يُقْتَلُ تُقْتَلَ تُقْتَلْ تُفْتَلَنَّ تُقْتَلَن
قتلتَ تُقتَلُ تُقْتَلَ تُقْتَلْ تُفْتَلَنَّ تُقْتَلَن
قُتِلْتِ تُقْتَلِينَ تُقْتَلِي تُقْتَلِي تُقْتَلِنٌ تُقْتَلِنَ
قتلتُ أُقْتَلُ أُقْتَلَ أَقْتَل
أُقْبَلْ أَقْتَلَنَّ أُقْتَلَن
44
،،
1 c.
Dual 3 m قُتِلَا يُقْتَلَانِ يُقْتَلَا يُقْتَلَا يُقْتَلَانِ
قُتِلَنَا تُقْتَلَانِ تُقْتَلَا تُقْتَلَا تُقْتَلَانِ
قُتِلْتُمَا تُقْتَلَانِ تُقْتَلَا تُقْتَلَا تُقْتَلَانِ
،،
3 f.
2 c.

m.
. 3 .Plur | قُتِلُوا يُقْتَلُونَ يُقْتَلُوا يُقْتَلُوا يُقْتَلُنَّ يُقْتَلُن
قُتِلْنَ يُقْتَلْنَ يُقْتَلْنَ يُقْتَلْنَ يُقْتَلْنَانٌ
3 f.
،،
2 m.
،،
2 f.
،،
1 c.
قُتِلْتُمْ يُقْتَلُونَ تُقْتَلُوا تُقْتَلُوا يُقْتَلُنَّ
تُقْتَلُن
قُتِلْتُنَّ تُقْتَلْنَ تُقْتَلْنَ تُقْتَلْنَ تُقْتَلْنَات
قتلنَا نُقتَلُ نُقْتَلَ نُقْتَل نَفْتَلَنَّ نُقْتَلَن
Inf.
Participle.
مَقْتُول
مَقْتُولَةٌ
OTHER FORMS, STRONG VERB, ACTIVE VOICE.
Imv.
Impf.
Sing. m.
،،
f.
Perf.
Sing. 3 m.
جَلَسَ
يَجْلِسُ
إِجْلِسٌ جُلُوس
107
يرفع
ارقم
فَرقَ
يَعْرَفُ
إفْرَقْ فَرَقُ
خَشُنَ
يَحْشُنُ
خُشُونَةٌ حَشَانَةٌ
،،
،،
،، ،،
،،
66 66
130
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
XI.
PARADIGM C. DERIVED FORMS,

X.
IX.
VIII.
VII.
إِنْقَتَلَ
اقْتَتَل
اقتل
إِسْتَقْتَلَ
انتال
D
يَنْقَتِلُ
يَقْتَتِلُ
يَقْتَلُ
يَسْتَقْتِلُ يَقْتَالُ
انْقَتل
انتيل
إقْتَلِلْ إسْتَقْيل
انتالل
D
- مُنْقَتِل
مُقْتَتِلُ مُقْتَل
مُسْتَقْتِل مُقْتَال
إِنْقِتَالُ
إِفْتِتَالُ اخْتِلَال إِسْتِقْتَالُ إِقْتِيلَال
أنفتل
اقتتل
أستقيل
يُنْقَتَلُ
يُقْتَتَلُ
يُسْتَقْتَلُ
مُنْقَتَل
مُقْتَتَل
مُسْتَقَتَل
IV.
III.
Passive.
PARADIGM D. QUADRILITERAL
II.
I.
تُمْطِرَ
تُقَمْطِرَ
أُقْمُنْطِرَ
أعْمُطِر
يُقَمْطَرُ
يُتَقَمْطَرُ
يُقْمَنْطَرُ
يُقْمَطَر
مُقَمطر
مُتَقَمْطَر
مُقْمَنْظَر
مُقْمَطَرٌّ
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
131
STRONG VERB, PRINCIPAL PARTS.


VI.
V.
IV.
III.
II.
قَتَّلَ
قَاتَلَ
يُقَتِّلُ
أَقْتَلَ تَقَبَّلَ
يُقَاتِلُ يُقتِلُ يَتَقَتَّلُ
تَقَاتَلَ
يَتَقَاتَلُ
قتل
قاتل
أَقْتِلُ تَقَبَّل
تَقَاتَلْ
\
مقتل مُقَاتِل مُقْتِل مُتَقَتل
مُتَقَاتل
تَقْتِيل
تفتيل قتال
قِنَال
انتال تقتل
إِقْتَالُ
تقاتل
تَقْتِلَةٌ
مُقَاتَلَةٌ
قُوتَلَ
قتل قوقل أُقْتِل تقتل
تُقُتِلَ
تقوقل
يُقَتَّلُ
يُقاتل
يُقْتَلُ يُتَقَبَّلُ
يُتَقَاتَلُ
مقبل
مُقَاتَل
مُقْتَل مُتَقَبَّل
مُتَقَاتَل
VERB, PRINCIPAL PARTS.
Active.
IV.
III.
II.
I.
Act Perf.
،،
Impf.
،،
Imv.
Part.
،،
Inf.
Pass. Perf.
،،
Impf.
Part.
Perfect.
قَمْطَرَ
تَقَمْطَرَ
إِقْمَنْطَرَ
إقْمَطَرَّ
.Imperfect يُقَمطر
يتَقَمْطَرُ
يَقْمَنْطِرُ
يَعْمَطِرْ
Imperative.
Participle.
Infinitive.
قَمْطِرْ
تَقَمْطَرْ
إِقْمَنْطِرْ
إِقْبَطْرِرْ
G
13
مُقَمْطِر
مُتَقَمطر
مُقْمَنْطِرْ
مُقْمَطِر
قَمْطَرَةٌ
تَقَمْطُرْ
إِقْمِنْطَارُ إِقْسِطَرَار
قِمْطَار
132
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
PARADIGM E. DOUBLED VERB, ACTIVE VOICE.
Imperfect.

2d Energ.
Jussive.
1st Energ.
Subj.
,
Perfect.
Indic.
Sing. 3 m.
،،
3 f.
،،
2 m.
،،
2 f.
،،
1 c.
Dual 3 m.
3 f.
2 c.
m.
،،
،،
مَدَدْتَ تَمُدُّ تمل مدُدْ تَمدن
مد
يمل
يمد يَمْدُدْ يَمُدن
13
مَدَّتْ تَمُدُّ
تمل
تَهْدُدْ تَمدن
يمدن
تَمُدَّن
مُدَّنَّ
تَمُدَّن
تَمُدِّنْ
أَمُدَّنْ
مَدَدْتِ تَمُدِّينَ تَمُدِي تَمُدِي تَمُدِنَّ
مَدَدْتُ أُمُدَّ أُمُدَّ امْدُدْ أُمَدَّنَّ
يَمُدَّانِ يَمُدًّا يَمُدًّا يَمُدَّانٌ
مَدَّنَا تَمُدَّانِ تَمُدَّا تَمُدَّا تَمُدَّانِ
مَدَدْتُمَا تَمُدَّان تَمُمَّا تَمُدَّا تَمُدَّانٌ
. 3 .Plur مَدُّوا يَمُدُّونَ يَمُدُّوا يَمُدُّوا يَمُدُّنَّ
3 f.
،،
،،
2 m.
2 f.
،،
1 c.
مَدَدْنَ يَمْدُدْنَ يَمْدُدْنَ يَمْدُدْنَ يَمْدُدْنَانِ
مَدَدْتُمْ تَمُدُّونَ تَمُدُّوا تَمُدُّوا تَمُدُّنَّ
مَدَدْتُنَّ تَمْدُدْنَ تَمْدُدْنَ تَمدُدْنَ تَمْدُدْنَانٌ
مَدَدْنَا نَبُدُّ نَهُدَّ نمدد نمدن
يَمُدَّن
تَمدُّن
نَمُدَّن
2d Energ.
1st Energ.
Imperative.
Simple.
امْدُدْ
أُمْدُدِى
أَمْدَدَا
أمددوا
أُمَدُدْنَ
مَادُّ
مَادَّةٌ
أَمْدُ دَنَّ أَمْرُدَن
أُمْدُدِنَّ أُمْدُدِنَ
أَمْرُدَانٌ
ه وو
أَمْدُدُنَ امْدُدُن
و
W
امْدُدْنَان
Infinitive.
43
مد
Sing. 2 m.
،،
2 f.
Dual 2 c.
Plur. 2 m.
،،
2 f.

Participle.
Sing. m.
،،
f.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
133
PARADIGM F. DOUBLED VERB, PASSIVE VOICE.
Imperfect.
Perfect.
2d Energ.
1st Energ.
Jussive. Subj.
Indic.
Sing. 3 m.
،،
3 f.
،،
2 m.
2 f.
،،
1 c.
Dual
3 m.
،،
3 f.
2 c.
،،
مد
يُمَدُّ
مُدَّت تُمَدُّ
يُمَد
يُمْدَدْ يُبَدِّن
يُمَدَّن
تُمْدَدْ تُمَدَّنَّ
تُمَدَّ
تُمَدَّن
مدِدْتَ تُمَدُّ
تُمْدَدْ تُمَدَّنَّ
تمَدَّ
تُمَدَّن
مُدِدْتِ تُمَدِّينَ تُمَدِّى تُمَدِّى تُمَدِّنَّ
مدِدْتُ أُمَدَّ
أُمَدَّ
أَمْدَدْ
امدن
تُمَدِّنْ
أُمَدَّنْ
يُمَدًا يُمَدَّانٌ
يُمَدَّانِ يُمَدَّا
مد
تُمَدًا تُمَدَّانِ
مُدَّنَا تُمَدَّانِ تُمَدَّا
تُمَدَّا تُبَدَّانِ
مدِدْتُمَا تُمَدَّانِ تُمَدَّا
.Plur. 3 m مُدُّوا يُمَدُّونَ يُمَدُّوا يُمَدُّوا يُمَدَّنَّ
،،
3 f.
2 m.
،،
2 f.
1 c.
مدِدْنَ يُبْدَدْنَ يُمْدَدْنَ يُبْدَدْنَ يُمْدَدْنَانٌ
مدِدْتُمْ تُمَدُّونَ تُمَدُّوا تُعَدُّوا تُبَدُّنٌ
يُمَدن
تُمَدُّنْ
مُدَدْتُنَّ تُمدَدْنَ تُمْدَدْنَ تُمْدَدْنَ تُمْدَدْنَانٌ
نُمَدَّن
نُمْدَدْ نُمَدَّنَّ
نُمَدَّ
مدِدْنَا نُمَدُّ
13
مَد
Imv.
or
or
Participle.
مَمْدُودٌ
مَمْدُودَةٌ
OTHER FORMS, DOUBLED VERB, ACTIVE VOICE.
مُدُّ
يَفِرُ أَفْرِرْ
إِمْلَلْ
Jus.
or
or
يمدِ
يَفْرِرٌ
يَمْلَلْ
Impf.
13
Sing.
m.

،،
f.
Perf.
Sing. 3 m.
13
مَرَّ
،،
،، ،،
،،
66 66
134
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
PARADIGM G. DOUBLED VERB, DERIVED FORMS.

VIII.
VII.
VI.
V.
IV.
III.
II.
Act.
Perf.
Act.
Impf.
مَدَّدَ مَادَدَ أَمَدَّ تَمَدَّدَ تَبَادَدَ إِنْمَدَّ امْتَدَّ إِسْتَمَدَّ
or
ماد
or
تَمَادَّ
يُمَدِّدُ يُمَادِدُ يُمِدُّ يَتَمَدَّدُ يَتَمَادَهُ يَنْمَدُّ يَمْتَدُّ يَسْتَمِدُّ
or
يُمَادُّ
Act.
.imv مدد مَدَدْ
Act.
Part.
Act.
Inf.
or
يَتَمَادُّ
مَادِدْ أَمْدِدْ تَمَدَّدْ تَمَادَدْ إِنْمَدِدْ إِمْتَدِدْ اسْتَمْدِدْ
or
أمدَّ
or
اسْتَمل
مُمَدِدٌ مُبَادِهُ مُسِدُّ مُتَبَدِّدُ مُتَمَادِدٌ مُنْمَدُّ مُمْتَدُّ مُسْتَمِدُّ
or
ميَاد
or
مُتَبَادُّ
تَبْدِيدٌ مِدَادٌ إِمْدَادٌ تَمَدُّدْ تَمَادُهُ إِنْمِدَادُ إِمْتِدَادُ إِسْتِمْدَادُ
مُبَادَدَة
or
Pass.
Perf.
Pass.
تَمَادٌ
or
مُبَادَة
مدد مُودِدَ أُمِدَّ تُمُدِدَ تُمُودِدَ أُنْمُدَّ أُمْتُدَّ أَسْتُمِدَّ
و
و
مُدِدَ
Pane يُمَدَّدُ يُمَادَهُ يُمَدُّ يُتَمَدَّدُ يُتَمَادَهُ يُنْمَدُّ يَمْتَدُّ يُسْتَمَدُّ
Impf.
or
يماد
or
يُتَمَادُّ
passe مُبَدَّدُ مُبَادَدٌ مُمَدُّ مُتَبَدَّدُ مُتَمَادَهُ مُنْبَةٌ ممتد
Part.
مستبد
or
مُتَماد
or
مُيَاد
PARADIGM H. HAMZATED VERB, DIFFERENT FORMS.
1. Forms having Hamza for the first radical.
Active.
Impf.
Perf.
31 (= to relate).
أَمَلَ
.(to hope = ) أمل
(=
= to exhale).
E و
.(to be slender =) أسل
يَأْثِرُ
تأمل
Imv.
اومل
Passive.
Impf.
Perf.
أمل
وو
يَأْسُلُ
إِيرَج
(أُوسُلٌ)
يوتر
,
.٤,
يومل
ور و
يورج
اسل
يُوسَل
يَارَجُ
وابه و
1
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
135
í
PARADIGM H, CONTINUED.
. 2. Forms having Hamza for the second radical.
يَسْأَلُ
إسأل
سُئِلَ يُسْأَلُ
يَسْأَمُ
إسام
سیم
يُسْأَمُ
يَلومُ
الوم
لُيَّمَ
ليم يُلام
3. Forms having Hamza for the third radical.
سَالَ
(= to ask).
Ai (= to be averse).
سیم
= to blame).
= to create).
برا
يبرا
إبرا
برى يُبرا
4
.(to congratulate = ) هنا
(≈ to sin).
(= to be brave).
يهني
خَطِي يَعْطا
12-
ـي
يُهْدَ
إِخْطَأ
خُطِئَ يُخطَأ
,
میں وے
جرو
يجرو
اجرو
جرى يُجْراً
The inflection is similar to the strong verb, e. g.,
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
أَثَرْتَ
أُثِرْتَ
أَثَرَتْ
أُثِرَتْ
سَأَلَ
سَأَلَتْ
سالت
سُلَت
سُئلت
يَسْأَلُ
يَسْأَلُ
يُسْأَلُ
تُسْأَلُ.
12" 2
بَرَأَتْ
بَرَأْتَ
ง
بری
تَبْرًا
بُرتَتْ
بُركَّتَ
يبرا
Perf. Act.
،،
Pass.
Impf. Act.
،،
Pass.
Perf. Act.
،،
Pass.
Impf. Act.
Pass.
Perf. Act.
،،
Pass.
Impf. Act.
،،
Pass.
136
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
VIII.
VII.
PARADIGM I. DERIVED FORMS,
VI.
.

تَأْثَرَ
تَاثَرَ
يَتَأَثَّرُ
يَتَاثَرُ
تَأَنَّرْ
SWE
مُتَأثِر
تَأْثُر
تاثر
مُتَاثِر
S
See 2 49. 13.
إبْتَتَرَ
إِيتَثِرْ
مو
إِيْتِثَار
أُوتُثِرَ
a
إِسْتَأَثَرَ
يَسْتَأْثِرُ
إِسْتَأْثِرْ
مُسْتَأْثِر
إِسْتِثْتَارْ
جه ویی
استوتر
يستات
يُتَاثَرُ
یوه
6-8 - 09
مُتَأْثر
مُتَاثر
موتت
مستاثر
134.
نَسَأَلَ
تَسَاءَلَ
إِنْسَأَلَ
إِسْتَأَلَ
إِسْتَسْأَلَ
يَتَسَأَلُ
يَتَسَاءَلُ
يَنْسَثِلُ
يَسْتَمْلُ
يَسْتَسْئِلُ
تَسَال
تَسَاءَل
إنسَئِل استيل
إِسْتَسْئِل
وں
متسئل
مُتَسَائِل مُنسَئِل مُسْتَئِل
مُسْتَسْئِل
134-
نَسَأَلٌ
تَسَاوُل
إِنْسَالُ إِسْتِثَالٌ
إِسْتِسال
تُسُمّل
تُسُوئِلَ
أُنْسُئل
أَسْتُثِلَ
أسْتسْئل
134.
يُتَسَأَلُ
يُتَسَاءَلُ
يُنسَأَلُ
يُسْتَألُ
يُسْتَسْأَلُ
مُتَسَال
مُتَسَاءَلُ
مُنسَال
,
GE o
SE
مستال
مُسْتَسال
E
تبر
ا
تَبَارَأَ.
إِنبَرَا
إبترا
استبرا
94
يتبر
يَتَبَارَا
ينبرى
يبترى
يستبرى
&
تبرا
تَبَارَا
إخْبَرِى
إِبْتَرِى
إستبرى
199
متبری
مُتَبَارَيَ
منبرى
مبترى
مستبرى
la,
تبرو
Ew,
تبرى
تَبَارو
تُبُوری
ه و
إبْتِرا
ау
194
متبر
يُتَبَارَ
ينبر
مُتَبَارَا
منبر
مبترا
مستبرا
مجھی و
ابترى
میں وہ
ہ
五
​استبرى
يستيا
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
137
HAMZATED VERBS, PRINCIPAL PARTS.
IV.
III.
آثَرَ
يو اثر
آثَرَ
آثر
إِتَارٌ
إِيثَارُ
II.
WE
• WE,
UWE
يوتر
أثر
موثر
G
تأثير
La L
یود
SE
موتر
Perfect Active.
Imperfect
Imperative
Participle
Infinitive
Perfect
Imperfect
Participle
،،
،،
،،
Passive.
،،
،،
یوا
یود
مواتر
موثر
سَأَلَ
134.
سَاءَ لَ
أَسْأَلَ
يُسَتِّلُ
يُسَائِلُ
يُسْمِلُ
سَمّل
سَائل
أسئل
مسئل
مسائل
مُسْتَل
تَسْئِیل
مُسَاءَ لَةٌ
إسال
سَول
سُوئِل
أَسْتَلَ
يُسأل
يُسَاءلُ
يُسْأَلُ
مُسَيَّل
مُسَاءَ ل
مُسْأَل
بَارَا
أَبْرَأَ
یبری
يُبَارِى
يبرى
&
પ
بری
بارة
60
مبری
مُبَارى
مُبَارَأَةُ
E
ابری
مبرى
إِبْرَا
ابری
194
مبرا
بورى
يبارا
مبارا
برِی
کتاب
يبرا
برا
Perfect
Active.
Imperfect
،،
Imperative
Participle
،،
Infinitive
،،
Perfect Passive.
Imperfect
،،
Participle
،،
Perfect Active.
Imperfect
(
Imperative
،،
Participle
،،
Infinitive
،،
Perfect
Passive.
Imperfect
Participle
،،
138
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
PARADIGM K.
ASSIMILATED VERB, DIFFERENT FORMS AND DERIVED
FORMS.
Passive.
Active.
Infinitive. | Imperat.
Initial
Imperfect. Perfect. Imperfect. Perfect.
,
وعِدَ يُوعَدُ عِدْ وَعْدُ عِدَةٌ
ورِثَ يُورَثُ رِتْ وِرتٌ رِئَةٌ
وَعَدَ يَعِدُ
وَرِثَ يَرِثُ
يَرِثُ وُرِثَ
وضع
وَجِلَ
S
ضِعَ يُوضَعُ ضَعْ وَضْعُ ضَعَةٌ
يَضَعُ وُضِعَ
يَوْجَلُ تُوُجِلَا
وو
يوسم
وجِلَ يُوجَلُ إِيجَل وَجَلٌ جِلَةٌ
أوسمَا يُوسَما أُوسُم
ا
G
وسم سمة
0203 20
يسر
ينع
يَيْنِعُ
يُنع
يُونَعُ
إينع
يَفَعَ
يبس
يبفع
پيبس
يَبِسَ
يُوبَسُ
إيبس
يُفعَ
"
يُوقَع
إِيفَعْ
990-
يسر
ييسر
يسر
يُوسَر
يُوَعِدُ وُعِدَ
= to prom-
ise.
to inherit.
= to place.
to be
afraid.
to be beau-
tiful.
Initial
ي
= to ripen.
= to be dry.
to ascend.
to be easy.
Derived Forms.
.2d Form وَعْدَ يُوعِدُ
،،
وعِدَ يُوَعْدُ وَعِدْ تَوْعِيدُ
3d وَاعَدَ يُوَاعِدُ رُوعِدَ يُوَاعَدُ وَاعِدْ مُوَاعَدَةٌ
أَوْعَدَ يُوعِدُ أُوعِدَ يُوعَدُ أَوعد إبعاد
إِيعَادُ
4th
،،
،،
،،
7th
،،
แ
،،
th تَوَعَدَ يَتَوَكَّدُ تُوعِدَ يُتَوَكَّدُ تَوَكَّدْ تَوَكَّدُ
th تَوَاعَدَ يَتَوَاعَدُ تُرُوعِدَ يُتَوَاعَدُ تَوَاعَدْ تَوَاعُدْ
Teh إِنْوَعَدَ يَنْوَعِدُ أُنْوُعِدَ يُنْوَعَدُ إِنْوَعِدْ إِنْوِعَادُ
8th إِنَّعَدَ يَتَّعِدُ أُتَّعِدَ يُتَّعَدُ يُتَّعَدُ إِنَّعِدُ إِنِّعَادُ
10th إسْتَوْعَدَ يَسْتَوْعِدُ أَسْتُوعِدَ يُسْتَوْعَدُ إِسْتَوْعِدُ إِسْتِيعَادُ
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
139
}
PARADIGM K, CONTINUED.
The inflection of tenses follows the strong verb, e. g.,
etc.
etc.
etc.
وَعَدْتَ
وَعَدَ
يَعِدُ
وَعَدَتْ
نَعِدُ
,,
يوسم
توسم
Perfect.
Imperfect.
·
،،
PARADIGM L. HOLLOW VERb, Different Forms and PrINCIPAL PARTS
Passive.
OF DERIVED FORMS.
Active.
Impf.
Perf.
Imv,
Impf.
Perf.
يُقَالُ
قيل
بيع
يُباع
يُخَافُ
خيف
قَالَ
يَقُولُ
قُل
بَاعَ
خَافَ
يَبِيعُ
يَخَافُ
Fine
c
Passive.
Part.
Inf.
Imv.
Impf.
Participles of the Derived Forms are made
by prefixing
to the Imperfect.
Active.
Perf. Impf.
Perf.
= to say.
to sell.
= to fear.
.2d Form | قول
،،
،،
،،
،،
،،
،،
يقول قول يُقَولُ قَول تَقْوِيل
يُقَولُ
3d فَاوَلَ يُقَاوِلُ قُووِلَ يُقَاوَلُ قَاوِلٌ مُقَاوَلَةٌ
4th أَقَالَ يُقِيلُ أُتِيلَ يُقَالُ أَقِلْ إِقَالَةٌ
Sth تَقَولَ يَتَقَولُ تُقوّلَ يُتَقَولُ تَقَولُ تَقُولُ
oth تَقَاوَلَ يَتَقَاوَلُ تُقُووِلَ يُتَقَاوَلُ تَقَاوَل تَقَاوُل
7th إنْقَالَ يَنْقَالُ أُنْقِيلَ يُنْقَالُ إِنْقَلْ إِنْقِيَالُ
sth إِقْبَالَ يَقْتَالُ أُثْنِيلَ يُقْتَالُ إِقْتَلُ إِقْتِيَالُ
10th إسْتَقَالَ يَسْتَقِيلُ أَسْتُقِيلَ يُسْتَقَالُ إِسْتَقِلْ إِسْتِقَالَةٌ -
1.
•

140
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
PARADIGM M. HOLLOW VERB, MEDIAL
و
Imperfect.
2d Energ.
Jussive.
1st Energ.
Subj.
Indic.
ACTIVE VOICE.
Perfect.
J Sing. 3 m.
( 3 f.
يَقُولُ يَقُولَ يَقُل
يَقُولَنَّ يَقُولَن
قَالَتْ تَقُولُ تَقُولَ تَقُلْ تَقُولَن تَقُولَن
تَقُولَنَّ تَقُولَنَّ
تَقُولِينَ تَقُولِي تَقُولِي تَقُولِن تَقُولِنَ
أَقُولُ أَقُولَ أَخُل
أقُولَنَّ أَقُولَن
قُلْتَ تَقُولُ تَقُولَ تَقُل
قُلْتِ
قُلتُ
قالا
يَقُولَانِ
قَالَنَا تَقُولَانِ
تَقُولَا تَقُولَا تَقُولَانِ
يَقُولَا يَقُولَا يَقُولَانٌ
قُلْتُمَا تَقُولَانِ تَقُولَا تَقُولَا تَقُولَانٌ
قَالُوا
يَقُولُونَ يَقُولُوا يَقُولُوا يَقُولُنَّ
قُلْنَ يَقُلْنَ يَقُلْنَ يَقُلْنَ يَقُلْنَان
يَقُولُن
قُلْتُمْ تَقُولُونَ تَقُولُوا تَقُولُوا تَقُولُنَّ تَقُولُن
قُلْتُنْ تَقُلْنَ تَقُلْنَ تَقُلْنَ تَقُلْنَان
قُلَّنَا
نَقُولُ نَقُولَ نَقُل نَقُولَن تَقُولَنَّ
2d Energ.
1st Energ.
Imperative.
Simple.
خُل
قُولَنَّ
13
قُولِي
قُولِنَّ
قُولَنَّ
قُول :
قُولَا
قولان
قولُوا
قُولُنَّ قُولُنَّ
قُلْنَ
قُلْنَان
Infinitive.
قول
1
،،
2 m.
،،
2 f.
،،
1 c.
Dual 3 m.
،،
3 f.
،،
2 c.
Plur. 3 m.
،،
3 f.
،،
،،
،،
2 m.
2 f.
1 c.
Sing. 2 m.
،،
2 f.
Dual 2 c.
Plur. 2 m.
2 f.
Participle.
فائل
قَائِدَةٌ
Sing.
،،
m
f.
t


AN ARABIC MANUAL.
141
PARADIGM N. HOLLOW VERB, MEDIALS, ACTIVe Voice.
Imperfect.
Perfect.

2d Energ. 1st Energ. Jussive.
Subj.
Indic.
. 3 .Sing سَارَ يَسير يسير يسر يَسِيرَ
m.
3 f.
66
2 m.
،،
2 f.
،،
1 c.
Dual 3 m.
،،
3 f.
،،
2 c.
يسيرن يَسِيرَن
نَسِيرَ تَسِرْ تَسِيرَن تَسِيرَن
سَارَتْ نَسِيرُ تَسِيرَ
سِرْتَ تَسِيرُ
C
تَسِر تَسِيرَنَّ نَسِيرَن
نَسِيرَ تَسِرْ
تَسِيرِينَ تَسِيرِى تَسِيرِى تَسِيرِنَّ تَسِيرِن
تُ أَسِير أسير أسِرُ أَسِيرَنْ أَسِيرَن
نیه
سَارَا يَسِيرَانِ يَسِيرًا يَسِيرًا يَسِيرَانِ
سَارَنَا تَسِيرَانِ تَسِيرًا تَسِيرًا تَسِيرَانِ
رْتُمَا تَسِيرَانِ تَسِيرًا تَسِيرًا تَسِيرَانِ
. 3 .Plur سَارُوا يَسِيرُونَ يَسِيرُوا يَسِيرُوا يَسِيرُنَّ يَسِيرُن
m.
،،
3 f.
،،
2 m.
(6
2 f.
1 c.
،،
سِرْنَ يَسِرْنَ
يَسِرْنَ يَسِرْنَ يَسِرْنَ يَسِرْنَانِ
سِرْتُمْ تَسِيرُونَ تَسِيرُوا تَسِيرُوا تَسِيرُنَّ تَسِيرُن
رْتُنَّ نَسِرْنَ تَسِرْنَ تَسِرْنَ تَسِرْنَانِ
سِرْنَا نَسِيرُ نَسِيرَ نَسِرٌ
نَسِر نَسِيرَن نَسِيرَن
2d Energ. 1st Energ.
Imperative.
Simple.
سیر
سیرن سِيرَن
سیری
سیون سیرن
سِيرًا
سِيرَاتِ
سيروا
سيرن سيرن
سِرْنَ
سِرْنَانٌ
Infinitive.
G
سا
*:69
سَائِرَة
2,421,921
سیر
Sing. 2 m.
2 f.
Dual 2 c.
Plur. 2 m.
2 f.
Participle.
Sing. m.
،،
f.
142
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
S
PARADIGM O. HOLLOW VERB, MEDIAL
Imperfect.
2d Energ.
Subj.
1st Energ. Jussive.
و
AND PASSIVE VOICE.
ی
Indic.
Perfect.
Sing. 3 m قِيلَ يُقَالُ يُقَالَ
قِيلَتْ تُقَالُ تُقَالَ
m.
،،
3 f.
66
2 m.
2 f.
،،
1 c.
m.
يُقَل يُقَالَن يُقَالَن
تُقَل : تُقَالَن تُقَالَن
قِلْتَ تُقَالُ تُقَالَ تُقَلَّ تُقَالَن تُقَالَن
قِلْتِ تُقَالِينَ تُقَالَى تُقَالى تُقَالِنَّ
تقالى تُقَالِنَ تُقَالِنَ
قُلْ أُقَالَنَّ
أُقَالَ أُقَلْ
قِلْتُ أَقَالُ أَقَالَ
. 3 Dual قِيلَا يُقَالَانِ يُقَالا يُقَالَا يُقَالات
،،
،،
3 f.
2 c.
3 m.
3 f.
قِيلَتَا تُقَالَانِ تُقَالَا تقَالَا تُقَالَانٌ
قِلْتُمَا تُقَالَانِ تُقَالَا تُقَالَا تُقَالَانٌ
أُقَالَن
. . .Plur قِيلُوا يُقَالُونَ يُقَالُوا يُقَالُوا يُقَالُنَّ يُقَالُوا يُقَالُنَّ يُقَالُن
قِلْنَ يُقَلْنَ يُقَلْنَ يُقَلْنَ يُقَلْنَانٌ
2 m.
،،
،،
،،
2 f.
1 c.
،،
قِلْتُمْ تُقَالُونَ تُقَالُوا تُقَالُوا دُقَالُنَّ
تُقَالُوا تُقَالُنَّ تُقَالُن
قلْتُنَّ تُقَلْنَ نُقَلنَ نُقَلْنَ تُقَلْنَان
قلنَا يُقَالُ نُقَالَ نُقَل نُقَالَنَّ نُقَالَن
Participle.
مَقُولٌ
مَقُولَةٌ
مَبِيعٌ
مَبِيعَة
Sing. m.
،،
f.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
143
PARADIGM P. DEFECTIVE VERB, DIFFERENT FORMS AND PRINCIPAL
PARTS OF DERIVED FORMS.
Impf.
Passive.
Active.

Perf.
Imv.
Impf.
Perf.
نَدَا
يَنْدُو
أُنْدُ
نُدِيَ
يُنْدَى
رمی
يرمي
إرْمِ
رمي
یرمی
رَضِيَ
يرضى
إِرْضَ
رفی
يرقى
سعی
يَسْعَى إِسْعَ
يسعى
ه و
مرو
يسرو
سُرِيَا يُسْرَى
ا
Passive.
Infinitive. Imperat.
Imperfect.
Perfect.
Active.
Imperfect. | Perfect.
to call.
to throw.
= to be
pleased.
= to go
quickly.
= to be no-
ble.
2d Form.
،،
غَنِّى
W
يُعَزِي غري يُغَرَى غَزَ تَعْرِيَةٌ
3d غَازَى يُغَازِي
4th
5th
،،
،،
غُرِيَ
غُوزِيَ
يُغَازَى غَازِ مُغَازَاةٌ
أغْزَى يُعْري أُغْرَيَ يُغْرَى أَفْر إغْرَاء
W
Sah تَعَزَّى يَتَعَزَّى تُغري يُتَعَرَّى تَعَرُ تَغَرٍ
oth تَعَارَى يَتَعَارَى تُغُوزي. يُتَعَارَى تَقَازَ تَعَاز
إنْغَزَى يَنْغَزِي أَنْعُرْيَ يُنْغَرَى انْقَر الغراء
إِنْغَزِ
7th
8th
(4
66
sh إغْتَرى يَعْتَرِي أَفْتُرِي يُعْتَرَى افْتَرِ اغْتِرَاء
10th
،،
090
104 إِسْتَغْرَى يَسْتَغْرِي أَسْتَغْرِي يُسْتَغْرَى إِسْتَغْرِ إِسْتِعْرَاءِ
144
AN ARABIC MANUAL..
PARADIGM R. DEFECTIVE VERB, THIRD RADICAL
FATHAED, ACTIVE VOICE.
Imperfect.
2d Energ.
Jussive.
1st Energ.
Subj.
Indic.
,,
MEDIAL RADICAL
Perfect.
.Sing. 3 m ندا
3f.
2 m.
2 f.
،،
،،
1 c.
يَنْدُو يَنْدُوَ يَنْدُ
يَنْدُونَ يَنْدُون
نَدَتْ تَنْدُو تَنْدُو تَنْدُ تَنْدُونَ تَنْدُونَ
نَدَرْتَ تَنْدُو تَنْدُوَ تَنْدُ تَنْدُونَ تَنْدُونَ
تَنْدِنْ
نَدَرْتِ تَنْدِينَ تَنْدِي تَنْدِي تَنْدِنَ
نَدَوْتُ أَنْدُو
أَنْدُو أَنْدُ أَنْدُونَ أَنْدُون
.Dual 3 m نَدَوا يَنْدَوَانِ يَنْدُوا يَنْدُوا يَنْدَوَانِ
،،
،،
3 f.
2 c.
نَدَنَا تَنْدُوَانِ تَنْدُوا تَنْدُوا تَنْدُوَانِ
نَدَوْتُمَا تَنْدُوَانِ تَنْدُوا تَنْدُوا تَنْدُوَانٌ
.Plur. 3m نَدَوا يَنْدُونَ يَنْدُوا يَنْدُوا يَنْدُنَّ -
نَدَوْنَ يَنْدُونَ يَنْدُونَ يَنْدُونَ يَنْدُونَاتِ
3 f.
،،
،،
2 m.
،،
2 f.
،،
1 c.
نَدَرْتُمْ تَنْدُونَ تَنْدُوا تَنْدُوا تَنْدُنَّ
نَدَوْتُنَّ تَنْدُونَ تَنْدُونَ تَنْدُونَ تَنْدُونَانِ
يَنْدُنْ
تَنْدُن
نَدَوْنَا نَنْدُو
نَنْدُو نَنْدُو نَنْدُ نَنْدُون نَنْدُونَ
Imperative.
Simple.
2d Energ.
1st Energ.
أُنْدُ
أُنْدُونَ
أُنْدُونَ
أُنْدِنَّ
أُنْدِنَ
أندى
أَنْدُوا
أُنْدُوَانِ
أُنْدُنَّ
أُنْدُوا
W
أُنْدُونَ
اندونان
أُنْدُن
Infinitive.
ندو
Participle.
ناد
نَادِيَةٌ
Sing. 2 m.
66
2 f.
Dual 2 c.
Plur. 2 m.
،،
2 f.
Sing.
،،
m.
f.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
145
PARADIGM S. DEFECTIVE VERB, THIRD RADICAL
RADICALS, MEDIAL RADICAL
FATHAED, ACTIVE VOICE.
Imperfect.
Perfect.
2d Energ. 1st Energ.
Jussive.
Subj.
Indic.
M
رمی
يرمى | يرمي
يرهـ
رمت
ترمی | ترم
ترمِ
يرمين
ترمي
رمیت
نرمی
ترمي
یرمین
ترمین
تَرْمِين تَرْمِينَ
رمیتِ تَرمِینَ تَرْمِي تَرْمِي تَرْمِنْ تَرْمِن
CE
,
CE
أَرْمِيَنْ
آرمین آرمین
رمیت
آرمی
رمي
يَرْمِيَ
يَرْمِيَانِ
Sing. 3 m.
،،
3 f.
64
2 m.
،،
2 f.
،،
1 c.
3 Dual | رَمَيَا يَرْمِيَانِ يَرْمِيَا
رَمَنَا تَرْمِيَانِ تَرْمِ
90
مَوا
،،
،،
m.
3 f.
2 c.
Plur. 3 m.
،،
3 f.
،،
2 m.
،،
2 f.
1 c.
(6
ترمیان
تَرْمِيَا
رَمَيْتُمَا تَرْمِيَانِ تَرْمِيَا نرْمِيَا تَرْمِيَانِ
90
يَرْمُونَ يَرْمُوا يَرْمُوا يَرْمُنُ يَرْمُن
يَرْمِينَ
رمین یرمین یرمِينَ يَرْمِينَ يَرْمِينَاتِ
,
قَوْمُوا قَوْمُوا قَوْمُنَّ قَوْمُنَ
رمیتم ترمون ترموا تَرْمُوا تَرْمُن
رمیتَن تَرْمِينَ تَرْمِينَ تَرْمِينَ تَرْمِينَانِ
نَرْمِيَ نَرْمِ نَرْمِيَنَ تَرْمِيَنْ
رَمَيْنَا نَرْمِي
2d Energ. 1st Energ.
Imperative.

Simple.
رْمِينَ إِرْمِين
إرمي
إِرْمِيَا
ارمن
إرْمِيَان
إرمن
إرْمِينَان
Infinitive.
907
رمی
إرْمِينَ
Participle.
رَامٍ
رامية
Sing. 2 m.
،،
2 f.
Dual 2 c.
Plur. 2 m.
،،
2 f.
Sing.
mnmn.
،،
f.
146
هر
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
1
PARADIGM T. DEFECTIVE VERB, THIRD RADICAL
و
RADICAL KESRAED, ACTIVE VOICE.
AND S, MEDIAL
Imperfect.
Perfect.
2d Energ.
Jussive.
1st Energ.
Subj.
Indic.
m.
3
Sing m رَضِيَ يَرْضَى يَرْضَى يَرْضَ
،،
3 f.
،،
2 m.
66
2 f.
،،
1 c.
يَرْضَى يَرضَ يرضين يرضين
رَضَيَنْ
تَرْضَيَنْ
رَضِيَتْ تَرضَى تَرْضَى تَرضَ ترضین ترضين
رضِيتَ تَرْضَى تَرْضَى تَرْضَ تَرْمَيَنَّ تَرْضَيَن
|
رَضِيتِ تَرْضَيْنَ تَرْةَ
ترضى رضَى تَرْضَينَ تَرْصَين
E
رَضِيتُ أَرْضَى
ارضی
أَرْضَ
E
ارضين ارضين
Dual 3 m رَضِيَا يَرْضَيَانِ يَرْضَيَا يَرْضَيَا يَرْضَيَانِ
،،
3 f.
2 c.
،،
رَضِيَنَا تَرْضَيَانِ تَرْضَيَا تَرْضَيَا تَرْضَيَانِ
رَضِيتُمَا تَرْضَيَانِ تَرْضَيَا تَرْضَيَا تَرْضَيَانِ
.. 3 .Plur رَضُوا يَرْضَوْنَ يَرْضَوْا يَرْضَوا يَرْضُونَ يَرْضَون
m.
،،
3 f.
،،
2 m.
2 f.
1 c.
رَضِينَ يَرْضَيْنَ يَرْضَيْنَ يَرْضَيْنَ يَرْضَيْنَانِ
رَضِيتُمْ تَرْضَوْنَ تَرْضَوْا تَرْضَوْا تَرْضَوْنَ تَرْضَوْنَ
رَضِيتُنَّ تَرْضَيْنَ تَرْضَيْنَ تَرْضَيْنَ تَرْضَيْنَانِ
رَضِينَا نَرْضَى نَرْضَى نَرْضَ نَرْضَيَنَّ نَرْضَيَنْ
•
2d Energ.
1st Energ.
Imperative.

Simple.
إِرْضَ
إِرْضَى
أَرْضَيَن أَرْضَيَن
إِرْضَينَ إِرْضَين
إِرْضَيَا
أَرْضَيَانٌ
إِرْضَوْا
إِرْضَينَ
ارْضَونَ ارْضَون
ارْضَيْنَان
Infinitive.
رِضًا
رِضْوَانٌ
Sing. 2 m.
،،
2 f.
Dual 2 c.
Plur. 2 m.
،،
2 f.
Participle.
راض
Sing. m.
رَاضِيَةٌ
،،
f.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
147
AND S,
AND و PARADIGM U. DEFECTIVE VERB, THIRD RADICAL
PASSIVE VOICE.
Imperfect.

Perfect.
2d Energ.
Jussive.
1st Energ.
Subj.
Indic.
3 .Sing نُدِي يُنْدَى يُنْدَى يُنْدَ يندَين يُندَين يُنْدَيَنَّ
m.
،،
3 f.
66
2 m.
66
2 f.
،،
1 c.
m.
نُدِيَتْ تُنْدَى تُنْدَى تُنْدَ تُنْدَيَنَّ تُنْدَيَن
نُدِيتَ تُنْدَى تُنْدَى تُند تندير
نُدِيتِ تُنْدَيْنَ تُنْدَى تُنْدَى تُنْدَين
أُنْدَى أَنْدَ
نُدِيتُ
أُنْدَى
أُنْدَيَنَّ
- 3 Dual نُدِيَا يُنْدَيَانِ يُندَيَا يُنْدَيًا يُنْدَيَانِ
3 f.
2 c.
m.
،،
،،
نُدِيَنَا تُنْدَيَانِ تُنْدَيَا تُنْدَيَا تُنْدَيَانِ
نُدِيتُمَا تُنْدَيَانِ تُنْدَيَا تُنْدَيَا تُنْدَيَانِ
تُنْدَين
تُنْدَين
أُنْدَيَنَّ
3 .Plur نُدُوا يُنْدَونَ يُنْدَوا يُنْدَوا يُندَون يُنْدَونَ يُنْدَونَ
نُدِينَ يُنْدَيْنَ يُنْدَيْنَ يُنْدَيْنَ يُنْدَيْنَاتِ
66 3 f.
،،
2 m.
،،
2 f.
،،
1 c.
Sing.
m
f.
نُدِيتُمْ تُنْدَوْنَ تُنْدَوا تُنْدَوا تُنْدَونَ
نُدِيتُنَّ تُنْدَيْنَ تُنْدَيْنَ تُنْدَيْنَ تُنْدَيْنَانٌ
تُنْدَون
نُنْدَيَنَّ
نُنْدَينْ
نُدينَا نُنَّدَى نُنْدَى نُنْدَ
Participle.
مندو
43
مندوة مرمية
148
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
4
PARADIGM V.
VERBS DOUBLY WEAK.


Perf. Pass.
Imperative.
Perf. 2 sg.
Imperfect.
Perf. 8 sg.
,
E
آبَ
ابْتَ
يووب
أَبْ
إِيبَ
,
ساء
سوت
يسوء
سی
}
جَاءَ
جِمْتَ
يَجِى
شَاءَ
شمَّتَ
أتَى
أَتَيْتَ
أَبَى
بی
نَأَى
جو الله
إِيبَ
أَبَيْتَ يَأْبَى ايب
یابی
نأَيْتَ يَنأى إنا
يَشَاءُ
جيء
شيء
شی
يَأْتِي
وَقَيْتَ
يقى
`G:
وَلِيَ
وَلِيتَ
يَلِي
ว
الأحد
الاه
وقِي
رَجِي
وَجِيتَ
يوجى
إيج
شَوَى
شَوَيْتَ يَشوِى
إِشْوِ
شُوِيَ
نَوِيَ قَوِيتَ يَقْوَى اقْرَ
1
\
حَبِيتَ
يَحْيَا اخي
إحْيَ
بي
عَبِيتَ
بَعْبَا
إِمْيَ
First Class.
b. (1), (2).
First Class.
c. (1), (2).
Second Class.
a.
Second Class.
b.
;
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
149
PARADIGM V, CONTINUED.

Imperfect Indicative.
3 m.
3 f.
2 f.
2 m.
1 c.
Sg.
یری .88 يَرَى
تَرَى
تَرَى
تَرَيْنَ أَرَى
Du يَرَيَانِ تَرَيَانِ تَرَيَانِ تَرَيَانِ
Pl.
PI يَرَوْنَ يَرين
یرین
تَرَونَ
تَرَيْنَ
نَرَى
أَرَ
ว
Jussive.
تَرَى
ا
Y:
تَرَيَا
تَرَيَا
تَرَبَ
يَرَيْنَ تَرَوْا
تَرَيْنَ
نَرَ
رَيْنَ
12
Sg.
Du.
Imperative.
Sg.
رَيَا
رره
Pl. f. Pl.m. Du. c. 8. f. 8. m
روا
Pl.
57.3.
150
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
PARADIGM W.
TREBLY WEAK AND OTHER VERBS.
1 c.
Perfect.
3 in,
3 f.
2 m.
2 f.
وَأَى
Sg.
Du.
8 رأى وَأَتْ وَأَيْتَ
وَأَيْتِ وَأَيْتُ
وأَيْتُمَا وَأَيْتُما
Da وَأَيَا وَأَنَا
Pl.
وَأَنا وَأَيْنَ وَأَيْتُمْ
-UE
وَايْتُنَّ وَأَيْنَا
وَأَيْنَ وَأَيْتُمْ وَأَيْتُنَّ
Imperfect Indicative.
تای
G
أمى
الله
تَايَانِ تَايَانِ
يَايَانِ تَايَانِ تَايَانِ
يَكُونَ يَابنَ تَكُونَ
تاین تای
Jussive.
يَا
قا
تا
قایی
વી
اله
al
إِينَ
تَايَا
اله لا
يَايَا
4l
تَأُوا
C:١
نا
الله دا
تَبِي نَا
يَاين تاوا
41
Sg.
? 58.
First
Du.
Class.
b.
Pl.
Sg.
Du يَايَا
يَأْوا
Pl.
Imperative.
Pl. f. Pl. m. Du. c. Sg. f.or Sg. m.
اوا
إى
|
1 c.
2 f.
2 m.
3 f.
3 m.
لَيْسَ
لَيْسَتْ
لَسْتَ
لَسْتِ
لَسْتُ
لَيْسَا
لَسْتُمَا
لَسْتُمَا
لَيْسَنَا
لَسْتُمْ
لَيْسُوا لَسْنَ
لَسْتُنَّ
لَسْنَا
Sg.
59. 1.
Du.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
151
F
PARADIGM X. FORMATION OF VERBAL NOUNS FROM WEAK VERBS.


Noun of
Time and
Place.
Patient
or
Agent
or Active
Verbal Noun
or
Infinitive.
Imperfect.
Perfect.
Passive Participle. Participle.
13
693
مَدَّ
يبل
مد
مَادُّ
أثر يَأْثِرُ
30E
مَهْدُودٌ
مَأْثُور
سَأَلَ يَسْأَلُ
سوال
سائل
مَسْئُولٌ
وَعَدَ
هَنَا يَهْنِيُّ مَنْ هَنَاءَةٌ هَانِي
يَعِدُ عِدَةٌ وَعْدٌ وَاعِدْ
,
مهنو
î
موعد
موعود
يَنَعَ يَبْعُ
ينع
يَانِعُ
قَالَ
يَقُولُ
قول
قَائِلُ
مَقُولٌ
مَقَال
10-
G
بَاعَ
بِيعُ
خَافَ يَخَافُ
يبيع
بَائِع
مَبِيعٌ
خوف
خَائِفٌ
مَخُوفٌ
G
هَرا يَغْرُو
غزو
فَازِ
مغزو
193
رَمَى يَرْمِي
یرمی
رمي
رَضِيَ
وَقَى
وَجِي
يوجى
مرمي
رمِي يَرْمَى رِضْوَانٌ رِهَا رَاضِ مَرْضِي
غِي or) مَرْضُو
يقِي وَقَايَةٌ وَلي وَاقِ
وَجى
رام
مَعْزى
مرمی
193
493
موتي
٤٠
واج
موجي
1993
ولى
وَالٍ
طَاو
رَاوِ
سي
مَطْوِيٌّ
43
مروي
ولي
•
يلى
طَوَى يَطوى
رَوِيَ
193
:
1993
طي
193
يَرْوَى
ري رِي
CHRESTOMATHY.
PART I.
THE ARABIC TEXT.
GENESIS 1.
จ
H
ا فِي الْبَدْءِ خَلَقَ اللهُ السَّمَوَاتِ وَالْأَرْضَ . " وَكَانَتِ الْأَرْضُ
خَرِبَةً وَخَالِيَةٌ وَعَلَى وَجْهِ الْقَبْرِ ظُلْمَةٌ وَرُوحُ اللَّهِ يَرُدُّ عَلَى
وَجْهِ الْمِيَاهِ. ٣ وَقَالَ اللهُ لِيَكُن نُورٌ فَكَانَ نُورٌ وَرَأَى م
اللَّهُ النُّورَ أَنَّهُ حَسَنٌ. وَفَصَلَ اللهُ بَيْنَ النُّورِ وَالظُّلْمَةِ.
النُّورَ نَهَارًا وَالظُّلمَةَ دَعَاهَا لَيْلًا. وَكَانَ مَسَاءً
ه وَدَعَا الله
وَكَانَ صَبَاحٌ يَوْمًا وَاحِدًا *
4 وَقَالَ اللهُ لِيَكُن جَلَدٌ في وَسَطِ الْبِيَاءِ . وَلَيَكُن فَاصِلاً .
بَيْنَ مِيَاءٍ وَمِيَاءٍ . ٧ فَعَمِلَ اللهُ الْجَلَدَ وَفَصَلَ بَيْنَ الْمِيَاهِ
الَّتِي تَحْتَ الْجَلَدِ وَالْمِيَاهِ الَّتِي فَوْقَ الجَلَدِ. وَكَانَ كَذلِكَ.
٨ وَدَعَا اللهُ الْجَلَدَ سَمَاءِ . وَكَانَ مَسَاءٌ وَكَانَ صَبَاحٌ يَوْمًا
ثانيًا *
وَقَالَ
لِتَجْتَمِعِ الْمِيَاهُ تَحْتَ السَّمَاءِ إِلَى مَكَانٍ وَاحِدٍ
وَلِتَظْهَرِ الْيَابِسَةُ. وَكَانَ كَذلِكَ . ١٠ وَدَعَا اللهُ الْيَابِسَةَ
أَرْضًا وَمُجْتَمَعَ الْمِيَاهِ دَعَاهُ بِحَارًا. وَرَأَى اللَّهُ ذَلِكَ أَنَّهُ
حَسَنٌ . " وَقَالَ اللَّهُ لِتُنْبِتِ الْأَرْضُ عُشْبا وَبَقَلًا يُبْزِرُ يَزْرًا
یزد
وَشَجَرًا ذَا ثَمَرٍ يَعْمَلُ ثَمَرًا كَجِنْسِهِ يَزْرُهُ فِيهِ عَلَى الْأَرْضِ. وَكَانَ
156
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
كَذلِكَ . ١٣
۱۲
فَأَخْرَجَتِ الأَرْضُ عُشبا وَبَقَلًا يُبْزِرُ يَزْرا كَجِنْسِهِ
WE و
وَشَجَرًا يَعْمَلُ قَمَرًا يَزْرُهُ فِيهِ كَجِنْسِهِ . وَرَاى اللهُ ذَلِكَ أَنَّهُ
حَسَن
۱۳ وَكَانَ مَسَاء وَكَانَ صَبَاحٌ يَوْمًا ثَالِنا *
١٣ وَقَالَ اللهُ لِتَكُن أَنْوَارٌ فِي جَلَدِ السَّمَاءِ لِتَفْصِلَ بَيْنَ
النَّهَارِ وَاللَّيْلِ ، وَتَكُونَ لِآيَاتٍ وَأَوْقَاتٍ وَأَيَّامٍ وَسِنِينَ.
ه وَتَكُونَ أَنْوَارًا فِي جَلَدِ السَّمَاء لِتُنِيرَ عَلَى الْأَرْضِ . وَكَانَ
كدية . 19 فَعَيلَ الله الثورين العَظِيمَيْن . النُّورَ الأَكْبَرَ
لِحُلْم النَّهَارِ وَالنُّورَ الْأَصْغَرَ لِحُلْم اللَّيْلِ. وَالنُّجُومَ . ١٧ وَجَعَلَهَا ١٧٠
فِي جَلَدِ السَّمَاءِ لِتُنِيرَ عَلَى الْأَرْضِ ١٨ وَلِتَحْكُمَ عَلَى
النَّهَارِ وَاللَّيْلِ وَلِتَفْصِلَ بَيْنَ النُّورِ وَالظُّلْمَةِ . وَرَاى الله

الله
19
ذلك أَنَّهُ حَسَنُ . ۱۹ وَكَانَ مَسَاء وَكَانَ صَبَاحٌ يَوْمًا رَابِعًا *
٢٠ وَقَالَ اللهُ لِتَفِضِ الْمِيَاهُ زَامَاتٍ ذَاتَ نَفْسٍ حَيَّةٍ وَلِبَطِرْ
طَيْرٌ فَوْقَ الْأَرْضِ عَلَى وَجْهِ جَلَدِ السَّمَاءِ ٠ ٣١ فَخَلَقَ اللَّهُ
التَّنَانِينَ الْعِظَامَ وَكُلَّ ذَوَاتِ الْأَنْفُسِ الْحَيَّةِ الدَّبَّابَةِ الَّتِي
فَاضَتْ بِهَا الْمِيَاهُ كَأَجْنَاسِهَا وَكُلَّ طَائِرٍ ذِي جَنَاحَ كَجِنْسِهِ .
وَرَأَى اللَّهُ ذَلِكَ أَنَّهُ حَسَنْ . ۳۳ وَبَارَكَهَا وَبَارَكَهَا اللهُ قَائِلًا ألمري
أَثْمِرِي
وَاكْتُرِي وَأَمْلَذِي الْمِيَاهَ فِي الْبِحَارِ. وَلْيَكْتُرِ الطَّيْرُ عَلَى الْأَرْضِ.
۲۳ وَكَانَ مَسَاء وَكَانَ صَبَاحٌ يَوْمًا خَامِسًا *
٢٩٥ وَقَالَ الله لِتُخْرِجَ الْأَرْضُ ذَوَاتِ أَنْفُسٍ حَيَّةٍ كَجِنْسِهَا.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
157
بَهَائِمَ وَدَبَّابَاتٍ وَوُحُوشَ أَرْضِ كَأَجْنَاسِهَا . وَكَانَ كَذَلِكَ.
۲۰ فَعَيلَ اللَّهُ وُحُوش الأَرْضِ كَأَجْنَاسِهَا وَالبَهَائِمَ كَأَجْنَاسِهَا
وَجَمِيعَ دَبابَاتِ الْأَرْضِ كَاجْنَاسِهَا وَرَأَى اللَّهُ ذَلِكَ أَنَّهُ
حَسَنٌ . ٣٩ وَقَالَ اللَّهُ نَعْمَلُ الإِنْسَانَ عَلَى صُورَتِنَا كَشَبَهِنَا:
فَيَتَسَلَّطُونَ عَلَى سَمَكِ البَحْرِ وَعَلَى طَيْرِ السَّمَاء وَعَلَى البَهَائِم
وعلى كُلِّ الأَرْضِ وَعَلَى جَمِيعِ الدَّبَابَاتِ الَّتِي تَدِبُّ عَلَى
الْأَرْضِ . ٣٧ فَخَلَقَ اللَّهُ الإِنْسَانَ عَلَى صُورَتِهِ . عَلَى صُورَةِ
الله وَقَالَ
اللَّهِ خَلَقَهُ . ذَكَرًا وَأَنْتَى خَلَقَهُمْ . ٣٨ وَبَارَكَهُمُ
لَهُمْ أَثْمِرُوا وَاكْتُرُوا وَامْلَدُّوا الْأَرْضَ وَأَخْضِعُوهَا وَتَسَلَّطُوا عَلَى
سَمَكِ الْبَحْرِ وَعَلَى طَيْرِ السَّمَاءِ وَعَلَى كُلِّ حَيَوَانٍ يَدِبُّ
٣٩ وَقَالَ اللهُ إِنِّي قَدْ أَعْطَيْتُكُمْ كُلَّ بَقْلٍ يُبْررُ

وہ و
و
عَلَى الْأَرْضِ
يَزْرا عَلَى وَجْهِ كُلِ الْأَرْضِ وَكُلَّ شَجَرٍ فِيهِ قَمَرُ شَجَرٍ يُبْزِرُ
يَزْرًا . لَكُمْ يَكُونُ طَعَامًا . ٣٠ وَلِكُلِّ حَيَوَانِ الْأَرْضِ وَكُلِّ طَيْرِ
السَّمَاء وَكَلِ دَبَّابَةٍ عَلَى الْأَرْضِ فِيهَا نَفْسٌ حَيَّةٌ أَعْطَيْتُ
كُلَّ عُشْبِ أَحْضَرَ طَعَامًا . وَكَانَ كَذَلِكَ *
٣١ وَرَأَى الله كُلَّ مَا عَمِلَهُ فَإِذَا هُوَ حَسَنٌ جِدًّا . وَكَانَ
مَسَاءِ وَكَانَ صَبَاحٌ يَوْمًا سَادِسًا
ع
1
GENESIS II.
الله
فَأُكْمِلَتِ السَّمَوَاتُ وَالْأَرْضُ وَكُلُّ جُنْدِهَا ، وَفَرَغَ
فِي الْيَوْمِ السَّابِعِ مِنْ عَمَلِهِ الَّذِي عَمِلَ . فَاسْتَرَاحَ فِي الْيَوْمِ
السَّابِعَ مِنْ جَمِيعِ عَمَلِهِ الَّذِي عَمِلَ. ٣ وَبَارَكَ ٣ وَبَارَكَ اللّهُ اليَوْمَ
السَّابِعَ وَقَدَّسَهُ لِأَنَّهُ ، فِيهِ أَسْتَرَاحَ مِنْ جَمِيعِ عَمَلِهِ الَّذِي
عَمِلَ اللَّهُ خَالِفًا *
هذِهِ مَبَادِيُّ السَّمَوَاتِ وَالْأَرْضِ حِينَ خُلِقَتْ يَوْمَ عَمِلَ
الرَّبُّ الإِلهُ الْأَرْضَ وَالسَّمَوَاتِ . كُلُّ شَجَرِ الْبَرِيَّةِ لَمْ يَكُن
بَعْدُ فِي الْأَرْضِ وَكُلُّ عُشْبِ البَرَيْهِ لَمْ يَنْبُتُ بَعْدُ . لِأَنَّ الرَّبَّ
الإله لَمْ يَكُنْ قَدْ أَمْطَرَ عَلَى الْأَرْضِ. وَلَا كَانَ إِنْسَانُ لِيَعْمَلَ
الْأَرْضَ . ٩ ثُمَّ كَانَ صَبَابٌ يَطْلَعُ مِنَ الْأَرْضِ وَيَسْقِي كُلَّ وَجْهِ
الْأَرْضِ ، وَجَبَلَ الرَّبُّ الإِلهُ آدَمَ تُرَابًا مِنَ الْأَرْضِ . وَنَفَحَ
V
فِي أَنْفِهِ نَسَمَةَ حَيُوةٍ . فَصَارَ آدَمُ نَفْسًا حَيَّةً ، وَغَرَسَ الرَّبُّ
.
هناكَ آدَمَ الذِي جَبَلَهُ.
الإله جَنَّةَ فِي عَدْنٍ شَرْقًا . وَوَقَعَ
٩ وَأَنْبَتَ الرَّبُّ الإِلهُ مِنَ الْأَرْضِ كُلَّ شَجَرَةٍ شَهِيَّةٍ لِلنَّظَرِ
وجيّدَةٍ لِلأَكْلِ. وَشَجَرَةَ الحَيوةِ فِي وَسَطِ الْجَنَّةِ وَشَجَرَةَ مَعْرِفَةِ
لخَيْرِ وَالشَّرِ. ١٠ وَكَانَ نَهْرُ يَخْرُجُ مِنْ عَدْنٍ لِيَسْقِيَ الْجَنَّةَ .
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
159
وَمِنْ هُنَاكَ يَنْقَسِمُ فَيَصِيرُ أَرْبَعَةَ رُؤوس " اِسْمُ الْوَاحِدِ
فِيشُونُ . وَهُوَ الْمُحِيطُ بِتجَمِيعِ أَرْضِ الْحَوِيلَةِ حَيْثُ الذَّهَبُ.
وَذَهَبُ تِلْكَ الْأَرْضِ جَيِّدٌ . هُنَاكَ الْمُقَلُ وَحَجَرُ الْجَزْعِ
وَاسْمُ النَّهْر الثَّانِي جِيعُونُ ، وَهُوَ الْمُحِيطٌ بِجَميع أَرْضِ
١٣
١٣
گوش ۱۴ وَاسْمُ النَّهْرِ الثَّالِثِ حِدَّائِلُ . وَهُوَ الْجَارِي شَرْقِيَّ
أَشُورَ . وَالنَّهرُ الرابع الفُرَاتُ *
١٥ وَاخَذَ الرَّبُّ الإِلهُ آدَمَ وَوَضَعَهُ فِي جَنَّةِ عَدْنٍ لِيَعْمَلَهَا
وَيَحْفَظَهَا. ١9 وَأَوْصَى الرَّبُّ الإِلهُ آدَمَ قَائِلاً مِنْ جَمِيعِ
شَجَرِ الْجَنَّةِ تَأْكُلُ أَكْاً. ۱۷ وَأَمَّا شَجَرَةُ مَعْرِفَةِ الخَيْرِ ١٧
وَالشَّرِ فَلَا تَأْكُلْ مِنْهَا . لِأَنَّكَ يَوْمَ تَأْكُلُ مِنْهَا مَوْنًا تَمُوتُ.
١٨ وَقَالَ الرَّبُّ الإِلهُ لَيْسَ جَمِّدًا أَنْ يَكُونَ آدَمُ وَحْدَهُ.
فَأَصْنَعَ لَهُ مُعِينًا نَظِيرَةُ 19 وَجَبَلَ الرَّبُّ الإِلهُ مِنَ الْأَرْضِ
كُلَّ حَيَوَانَاتِ الْبَرِيَّةِ وَكُلَّ طُيُورِ السَّمَاءِ . فَأَحْضَرَهَا إِلَى آدَمَ
لِيَرَى مَاذَا يَدْعُوهَا . وَكُلُّ مَا دَعَا بِهِ آدَمُ ذَاتَ نَفْسٍ حَيَّةٍ
فَهُوَ أَسْمُهَا. ٢٠ فَدَهَا آدَمُ بِأَسْمَاءِ جَمِيعَ البَهَائِمِ وَطُيُورَ
السَّمَاءِ وَجَمِيعَ حَيَوَانَاتِ الْبَرِيَّةِ. وَأَمَّا لِنَفْسِهِ فَلَمْ يَجِدْ مُعِينًا
نظيره ٣١ فَأَوْقَعَ الرَّبُ الإِلهُ سُبَانًا عَلَى آدَمَ قَدَامَ. فَأَخَذ
.
۲۱
وَاحِدَةً مِنْ أَصْلَاعِهِ وَمَلَا مَكَانَهَا لَحْمَا. ۳۳ وَبَلَى الرَّبُّ الإله ۲۲
160
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
الصّلعَ الَّتِي أَخَذَهَا مِنْ آدَمَ امْرَأَةَ وَأَحْضَرَهَا إِلَى آدَمَ. ۲۳
فَقَالَ آدَمُ هَذِهِ الآنَ عَظْمٌ مِنْ عِظَامِي وَلَكُمْ مِنْ لَحْمِي. هَذِهِ
تُدْعَى امْرَأَةَ لِأَنَّهَا مِن آمره أُخِدَتْ. ۲۴ لِذلِكَ يَتْرُكُ الرَّجُلُ
أبَاهُ وَأَمَّهُ وَيَلْتَصِقُ بِامْرَأَتِهِ وَيَكُونَانِ جَسَدًا وَاحِدًا. ۲۰ وَكَانَا
كِلَاهُمَا عُرْيَانَيْنِ آدَمُ وَامْرَأَتُهُ وَهُمَا لَا يَحْتَجَلَانِ
GENESIS III.
الرب
ا وكانت الحية أحيل جميع حيوانات البرية التي عملها
1
كل
من
الاله . فقالت للمرأة أحقًا قال الله لا تاكلا
شجر الجنَّة. ۲ فقالت المرأة للحية من ثمر شجر الجنَّة
ناكل . ٣ واما ثمر الشجرة التي في وسط الجنة فقال الله لا
تاكلا منه ولا تمساهُ لئَلَّا تموتا . ۴ فقالت الحيّة للمرأة
لن تموتا . ه بل الله عالم انه يوم تاكلان منه
تنفتح
اعينكما وتكونان كالله عارفين الخير والشر. عارفين الخير والشر. 4 فرأت المرأة
ان الشجرة جيدة للاكل وانها بهجة للعيون وان الشجرة
شهيّة للنظر . فاخذت من ثمرها واكلت واعطت رجلها
V
ايضًا معها فاكل . ٧ فانفتحت اعينهما وعلما انهما عريانان.
فتخاطا اوراق تین وصنعا لانفسهما مآزر
Λ
وسمعا صوت الرب الاله ماشيًا في الجنَّة عند هبوب
E
ريح النهار فاختباً آدم وامرأته من وجه الرب الاله في
وسط شجر الجنَّة . 9 فنادى الرب الاله آدم وقال له اين
انت . ۱۰ فقال ۱۰ فقال سمعت صوتك في الجنَّة فخشيت لاني عريان
فاختبأت . " فقال من اعلمك انك عريان . هل اكلت من
162
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
الشجرة التي اوصيتك ان لا تاكل منها. ١٣ فقال آدم المرأة
التي جعلتها معي هي اعطتني من الشجرة فاكلت. ١٣
E
فقال الرب الاله للمرأة ما هذا الذي فعلتِ . فقالت المرأة
الحية غرتني فاكلت . ۱۴ فقال الرب الاله للحيَّة لانك فعلتِ
هذا ملعونة انت من جميع البهائم ومن جميع وحوش
البرية . على بطنك تسعين وترابًا تاكلين كل ايام حياتك.
E
١٥ وأضع عداوةً بينك وبين المرأة وبين نسلك ونسلها . هو
يسحق راسك وانتِ تسحقين عقبه . ١٩ وقال للمرأَة تكثيرًا
اكثر اتعاب حبلك . بالوجع تلدين اولادا . والى رجلك يكون
اشتياقك وهو يسود عليك . ١٧ وقال لآدم لانك ۱۷ وقال لآدم لانك سمعت لقول
امرأتك واكلت من الشجرة التي اوصيتك قائلاً لا تاكل
منها ملعونة الارض بسببك. بالتعب تاكل منها كل ايام
حياتك . ۱۸ وشوكا وحسكًا تنبت لك وتاكل عشب الحقل. ١٩
أخذت
بعَرَف وجهك تأكل خبرًا حتى تعود الى الارض التي
منها . لانك تراب والى تراب تعود *
3
. ودعا آدم اسم امرأته حواء لانها ام كل حي. ٣١ وصنع
الرب الاله لآدم وامرأته اقمصةً من جلد والبسهما
4 وقال الرب الاله هوذا الانسان قد صار كواحد منا عارفا
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
163
!
الخير والشرّ . والآن لعله يمد يده وياخذ من شجرة الحيوة
من
ايضًا وياكل ويحيا الى الابد ۲۳ فاخرجه الرب الاله
جنّة عدن ليعمل الأرض التي أخذ منها . ۲۴ فطرد الانسان
واقام شرقي جنة عدن الكروبيم ولهيب سيف متقلب لحراسة
طريق شجرة الحيوة *
0
1
SELECTIONS FROM THE KURAN.
سورة فاتحة الكتاب
بِسمِ اللَّهِ الرَّحْمَنِ الرَّحِيمِ
أَلْحَمْدُ لِلَّهِ رَبِّ الْعَالَمِينَ * الرَّحْمَنِ الرَّحِيمِ * مَالِكِ يَوْمِ
الدین * إِيَّاكَ نَعْبُدُ وَإِيَّاكَ نَسْتَعِينُ * اهْدِنَا الصِّرَاطَ
الدِّينِ
المُسْتَقِيمَ * صِرَاطَ الَّذِينَ أَنْعَمْتَ عَلَيْهِمْ غَيْرِ الْمَغْضُوبِ
عَلَيْهِمْ وَلَا الضَّالِّينَ
سورة التغابن
1
بسم اللهِ الرَّحْمَنِ الرَّحِيمِ
لِلَّهِ مَا فِي السَّمَوَاتِ وَمَا فِي الْأَرْضِ لَهُ الْمُلْكُ وَلَهُ
يسبح
الحَمْدُ وَهُوَ عَلَى كُلِّ شَيْءٍ قَدِيرٌ . ٢ هُوَ الَّذِي خَلَقَكُمْ فَمِنْكُمْ
كَافِرٌ وَمِنْكُمْ مُؤْمِنٌ وَاللَّهُ بِمَا تَعْمَلُونَ بَصِيرٌ. ٣ خَلَقَ السَّمَوَاتِ
والْأَرْضَ بِالْحَقِّ وَصَوَّرَكُمْ فَأَحْسَنَ صُوَرَكُمْ وَإِلَيْهِ الْمَصِيرُ .
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
165
*
يَعْلَمُ مَا فِي السَّمَوَاتِ وَالْأَرْضِ وَيَعْلَمُ مَا تُسِرُونَ وَمَا تُعْلِنُونَ
واللَّهُ عَلِيمٌ بِذَاتِ . أَلَمْ يَأْتِكُمْ نَبَأَ الَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا
الصدور
مِنْ قَبْلُ فَذَاقُوا وَبَالَ أَمْرِهِمْ وَلَهُمْ عَذَابٌ أَلِيمٌ . و ذَلِكَ بِأَنَّهُ
كَانَتْ تَأْتِيهِمْ رُسُلُهُمْ بِالْبَيِّنَاتِ فَقَالُوا أَبَشَرْ يَهْدُونَنَا فَكَفَرُوا
وَتَوَلَّوْا وَاسْتَغْنَى اللَّهُ وَاللَّهُ غَنِيٌّ حَمِيدٌ ، زَعَمَ الَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا
.
أَنْ لَنْ يُبْعَثُوا قُلْ بَلَى وَرَبِّي لَتُبْعَثُنَّ ثُمَّ لَتُنَبَّونَ بِمَا عَمِلْتُمْ
وَذَلِكَ عَلَى اللَّهِ يَسِيرٌ ، فَآمِنُوا بِاللَّهِ وَرَسُولِهِ وَالنُّورِ الَّذِي
أنْزَلْنَا وَاللَّهُ بِمَا تَعْمَلُونَ خَبِيرٌ . و يَوْمَ يَجْمَعُكُمْ لِيَوْمِ الجمع
ذلك يَوْمُ التَّعَابُنِ وَمَن يُؤْمِنَ بِاللَّهِ وَيَعْمَلْ صَالِحًا يُكَفِّرْ عَنْهُ
سَاتِهِ وَيُدْخِلْهُ جَنَّاتٍ تَجْرِى مِنْ تَحْتِهَا الْأَنْهَارُ خَالِدِينَ
فِيهَا أَبَدًا ذَلِكَ الْفَوْزُ الْعَظِيمُ . ١٠ وَالَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا وَكَذَّبُوا
بِآيَاتِنَا أُولَائِكَ أَصْحَابُ النَّارِ خَالِدِينَ فِيهَا وَبِئْسَ الْمَصِيرُ.
اا
ول
ولكم
مَا أَصَابَ مِنْ مُصِيبَةٍ إِلَّا بِإِذْنِ اللَّهِ وَمَن يُؤْمِن بِاللَّهِ
يَهْدِ قَلْبَهُ وَاللَّهُ بِكُلِ شَيْءٍ عَلِيمٌ . ١٣ وَأَطِيعُوا اللَّهَ وَأَطِيعُوا
الرَّسُولَ فَإِنْ تَوَلَّيْتُمْ فَإِنَّمَا عَلَى رَسُولِنَا الْبَلَاغُ الْمُبِين . ١٣ الله
لَا إِلَهَ إِلَّا هُوَ وَعَلَى اللَّهِ فَلْيَتَوَكَّلِ الْمُؤْمِنُونَ . ۱۴ يَاأَيُّهَا
الَّذِينَ آمَنُوا إِنَّ مِنْ أَزْوَاجِكُمْ وَأَوْلَادِكُمْ عَدُوًّا لَكُمْ فَاحْذَرُوهُمْ
وَإِنْ تَعْفُوا وَتَصْفَحُوا وَتَغْفِرُوا فَإِنَّ اللَّهَ غَفُورٌ رَحِيمٌ . ١٥ إِنَّمَا
166
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
أَمْوَالُكُمْ وَأَوْلَادُكُمْ فِتْنَةٌ وَاللَّهُ عِنْدَهُ أَجْرٌ عَظِيمٌ . ١٩ فَاتَّقُوا
اللَّهَ مَا اسْتَطَعْتُمْ وَاسْمَعُوا وَأَطِيعُوا وَأَنْفِقُوا خَيْرًا لِأَنْفُسِكُمْ وَمَنْ
يُوقَ شُحَّ نَفْسِهِ فَأُولَآئِكَ هُمُ الْمُفْلِحُونَ . ١٧ إِنَّ تُقْرِضُوا اللَّهَ
قَرْضًا حَسَنًا يُضَاعِفَهُ لَكُمْ وَيَغْفِرْ لَكُمْ وَاللَّهُ شَكُورٌ حَلِيمٌ .
عَالِمُ الْغَيْبِ وَالشَّهَادَةِ العَزِيزُ الْحَكِيمُ *
١٨
سورة العلق
بِسْمِ اللَّهِ الرَّحْمَنِ الرَّحِيمِ
ا إقْرَأْ بِاسْمِ رَبِّكَ الَّذِى خَلَقَ ٠ ٢ خَلَقَ الْإِنْسَانَ مِنْ
عَلَقٍ . ٣ إِقْرَأْ وَرَبُّكَ الْأَكْرَمُ . * الَّذِي عَلَّمَ بِالْقَلَم . عَلَّمَ
الإِنْسَانَ مَا لَمْ يَعْلَمْ . كَلَّا إِنَّ الإِنْسَانَ لَيَطْغَى ٠ ٠ أَنْ رَآهُ ٧
اسْتَغْنَى . ٨ إِنَّ إِلَى رَبِّكَ الرَّجْعَى . . أَرَأَيْتَ الَّذِي يَنْهَى.
ا عَبْدًا إِذَا صَلَّى . " أَرَأَيْتَ إِنْ كَانَ عَلَى الْهُدَى . ١٣ أَوْ أَمَرَ
بِالتَّقْوَى . ١٣ أَرَأَيْتَ إِنْ كَذَّبَ وَتَوَلَّى . ١٥ أَلَمْ يَعْلَمْ بِأَنَّ اللَّهَ
۱۴
يَرَى . ١٥ كَلَّا لَئِنْ لَمْ يَنْتَهِ لَنَسَفَعًا بِالنَّاصِيَةِ 14 نَاصِيَةٍ كَاذِبَةٍ
ا
خَاطِئَةٍ . ١٧ فَلْيَدْعُ نَادِيَهُ . ۱۸ سَنَدْعُ الرَّبَانِيَةَ . ١٩ كَلَّا لَا
تُطِعْهُ وَاسْجُدْ وَاقْتَرِبْ
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
167
1
Λ
سورة الضحى
بسم اللهِ الرَّحْمَنِ الرَّحِيمِ
ا وَالضُّحَى ٣٠ وَاللَّيْلِ إِذَا سَجَى ٠ ٣ مَا وَدَّعَكَ رَبُّكَ وَمَا
قلَى . • وَلَلآخِرَةُ خَيْرٌ لَكَ مِنَ الأُولَى . . وَلَسَوْفَ يُعْطِيكَ رَبُّكَ
فَتَرْضَى . أَلَمْ يَجِدْكَ يَتِيمًا فَآوَى ٠ ٧ وَوَجَدَكَ ضَالَّا فَهَدَى.
وَوَجَدَكَ عَائِلًا فَأَغْنَى . و فَأَمَّا الْيَتِيمَ فَلَا تَفْهَرْ. ١٠ وَأَمَّا
٩
السَّائِلَ فَلَا تَنْهَرْ. " وَأَمَّا بِنِعْمَةِ رَبِّكَ فَحَدِتْ
PART II.
TRANSLITERATION, TRANSLATION AND ANALYSIS.
TRANSLITERATION OF GEN. I. I—19.
1. Fil-bad-i kha-la-kal-la-hus-sa-ma-wa-ti wal-ar-da. 2. Wa-ka-na-til-
ar-do kha-ri-ba-tan wa-kha-li-ya-tan wa-aa-la wag-hil-gham-ri zul-ma-tun
wa-rū-ḥul-lā-hi ya-ruf-fu aa-la wag-hil-mi-ya-hi. 3. Wa-ka-lal-la-hu li-ya-
kun nū-run fa-kā-na nū-run. 4. Wa-ra-al-la-hun-nu-ra an-na-hu ḥa-sa-
nun wa-fa-șa-lal-la-hu bai-nan-nu-ri waz-zul-ma-ti. 5. Wa-da-aal-la-hun-
nū-ra na-hā-ran waz-zul-ma-tu da-aā-hā lai-lan wa-kā-na ma-sā-un wa-kā-
na sa-ba-hun yow-man wa-hi-dan.
...
6. Wa-kā-lal-lā-hu li-ya-kun ga-la-dun fi wa-sa-til-mi-ya-hi wal-ya-kun
fă-și-lan bai-na mi-ya-hin wa-mi-ya-hin. 7. Fa-aa-mi-lal-la-hul-ga-la-da
wa-fa-șa-la bai-nal-mi-ya-hil-la-tī taḥ-tal-ga-la-di wal-mi-ya-hil-la-ti fow-
kal-ga-la-di wa-kā-na ka-za-li-ka. 8. Wa-da-aal-la-hul-ga-la-da sa-mā-an
wa-kā-na ma-sā-un wa-ka-na ṣa-ba-ḥun yow-man tha-ni-yan.
9. Wa-ka-lal-la-hu li-tag-ta-mi-ail-mi-ya-hu taḥ-tas-sa-mā-i e-la ma-kā-
nin wā-ḥi-din wa-li-taz-ha-ril-ya-bi-sa-tu wa-kā-na ka-zā-li-ka. 10. Wa-
da-aāl-lā-hul-yā-bi-sa-ta ar-dan wa-mug-ta-ma-aul-mi-yā-hi da-aā-hu bi-
ḥā-ran wa-ra-al-la-hu za-li-ka an-na-hu ha-sa-nun. 11. Wa-ka-lal-la-hu
li-tun-bi-til-ar-do aush-ban wa-bak-lan yub-zi-ru biz-ran wa-sha-ga-ran zā
tha-ma-rin yaa-ma-lu tha-ma-ran ka-gin-si-hi biz-ru-hu fi-hi aa-lal-ar-di
wa-ka-na ka-za-li-ka. 12. Fa-akh-ra-ga-til-ar-do aush-ban wa-bak-lan yub-
zi-ru biz-ran ka-gin-si-hi wa-sha-ga-ran yaa-ma-lu tha-ma-ran biz-ru-hu fī-
hi ka-gin-si-hi wa-ra-al-lā-hu zā-li-ka an-na-hu ḥa-sa-nun. 13. Wa-kā-na
ma-sā-un wa-kā-na ṣa-bā-ḥun yow-man tha-li-than.
14. Wa-ka-lal-la-hu li-ta-kun an-wa-run fi ga-la-dis-sa-mã-i li-taf-și-la
bai-nan-na-ha-ri wal-lai-li wa-ta-kū-na li-aa-ya-tin wa-aw-kā-tin wa-ai-yā-
min wa-si-nī-nin. 15. Wa-ta-kū-na an-wā-ran fī ga-la-dis-sa-mā-i li-tu-nī-
ra aa-lal-ar-di wa-kā-na ka-za-li-ka. 16. Fa-aa-mi-lal-la-hun-nū-rai-nil-
aa-zī-mai-nin-nū-ral-ak-ba-ra li-ḥuk-min-na-hā-ri wan-nu-ral-aş-gha-ra li-
ḥuk-mil-lai-li wan-nu-gu-ma. 17. Wa-ga-aa-la-hāl-lā-hu fī ga-la-dis-sa-
mā-i li-tu-nī-ra aa-lal-ar-di. 18. Wa-li-taḥ-ku-ma aa-lan-na-ha-ri wal-lai-li
wa-li-taf-şi-la bai-nan-nu-ri waz-zul-ma-ti wa-ra-al-la-hu zā-li-ka an-na-hu
ḥa-sa-nun. 19. Wa-kā-na ma-sā-un wa-kā-na ṣa-ba-ḥun yow-man rā-bi-aan.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
169
LITERAL TRANSLATION OF GEN. I. 1–19.
1. In the beginning he created God the heavens and the earth.
2. And she was the earth waste and empty, and upon the face of the
deep, darkness; and the Spirit of God moved upon the face of the waters.
3. And he said God, Let be light, and he (it) was light.
4. And he saw God the light that he (it) good, and he separated God
between the light and the darkness.
5. And he called God the light day, and the darkness he called her (it)
night. And he (it) was evening, and he (it) was morning, day one.
6. And he said God, Let be a beaten covering in the midst of the
waters, and let be a separation between waters and waters.
7. And he worked God the beaten covering, and he separated between
the waters that under the beaten covering and the waters that above the
beaten covering; and it was thus.
8. And he called God the beaten covering a heaven. And it was even-
ing and it was morning, day second.
9. And he said God, Let be collected the waters under the heaven to a
place one, and let appear the dry; and it was thus.
10. And he called God the dry, earth, and the collection of waters he
called seas. And he saw God that it good.
11. And he said God, Let produce the earth herbage and herbs yielding
seed and tree of fruit working fruit according to its kind its seed in it
upon the earth; and it was thus.
12. And she brought forth the earth herbage and herbs yielding seed
according to its kind, and tree working fruit its seed in it according to
its kind, and he saw God that it was good.
13. And it was evening and it was morning, day third.
14. And he said God, Let be lights in the beaten covering of the
heaven to separate between the day and the night, and shall be to signs
and times and days and years.
15. And shall be lights in the beaten covering of the heaven to give
light upon the earth; and it was thus.
16. And God worked the two lights the great, the greater to rule the
day, and the light the lesser to rule the night, and the stars.
17. And he appointed her God in the beaten covering of the heaven to
give light upon the earth.
18. And to rule upon the day and the night, and to separate between
the light and the darkness.
19. And it was evening and it was morning, day fourth.
ANALYSIS OF GEN. I. 1–5.
في البَدْءِ ..
= In the beginning.
a. ¿ prep. = in.
في
the following waşla.
Yay preceded by kesra here short on account of
15. 5. b.
b. Ji def. art. = the. Alif has waşla and is therefore to be elided
in pronunciation. 15. 2. 3. a.
C.
E
بدأ noun = بدء
بَدْءِ
beginning. The root is to begin. The hamza
of the noun stands for alif, while the kesra shows it to be in the depend-
ent case, after the preposition in.
2. Gi
= he created. Strong verb, ground form, 3 sg. m. perf.
.he created, God the heavens = خَلَقَ اللهُ السَّموات .
خَلَقَ
الله
α.
b. ¿Ï = God. A contraction of the def. art. J and the name
UE
of God properly. Written fully it would be. The alif of
=
is represented by perpendicular fatha over tashdeed. The alif of the def.
1
art. in f has waşla, therefore elided (1. b.). The lam of the art. is also
elided because preceding a solar letter, viz., the second lam, which there-
fore has tashdeed (?? 23. 7; 13. 5. a). is a noun from the verb Ji
الله
= to worship, and is in the Nom. case, as indicated by damma, subject of
the verbálá.
خَلَقَ
السَّمَوَاتِ
C.
= the heavens. Noun, subst. fem. pl. 2d declension,
having only two case endings, one for the oblique cases; here the Acc.
after. It is derived from
سَمَا or
سمو
= to be high. The alif
and lam of the prefixed art. both elided, as see 1. b, 2. b.
وَالْأَرْضَ .
3.
== and the earth.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
171
a. 5
=
and. Inseparable conjunction.
b. ji the. See 1. b.
C.
أرض
أَرْضَ
earth. Noun, subst. 1st declension fem. Acc. case
أَرْضَ From خَلَقَ indicated by fatha, and after to be = أرة
= to be productive.
و
.and she was the earth = وَكَانَتِ الْأَرْضُ
4.
α. 5
= and. Inseparable conjunction.
b. 5=she
she was. Perf. 3 sg. fem., the subject being fem.
= كَانَ From
أرْضُ
= to be, for, the fatha of kaf having changed the waw
into the homogeneous alif. For kesra see ? 15. 5. d.
5.
C.
خَرِبَةً
20E000
[= the earth. Prefix art. see 1. b. Noun, fem. Nom. see 3. c.
= a waste. Noun, adj., indefinite as shown by tenween, fem.
,E
as indicated by tay, and agreeing with, Acc. after ☺. From
= to be waste.
6.5= and vacant. Conjunction
= خَرِبَ
وَخَالِيَةً
to be = خَلَوْ
وَعَلَى
= to be empty, vacant.
and; and fem. adj. of
عَلَى
7. ¿c = and upon. Conjunction and separable prep. = upon.
8.
وَجَدَ
.face of the deep = وَجْهِ الْعَم
a.
x= face of. Subst., masc. Dep. case, in construction, from
= to strike on the face.
العمر
= the deep. Ji
آل
see 1. b.
construction, from
غَمُرَ
ظُلمَةٌ
غَمْرِ
noun, masc. Dep. case in
= to be abundant, deep.
9. = darkness. Noun, subst. fem. Nom. case, from =
do wrong, be dark.
=
to ظَلَمَ
وَرُوحُ اللّهِ 0.
= and the Spirit of God.
172
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
a.
وَرُوحُ
and the Spirit.
conj. Noun, subst. masc. or fem.,
رَاحَ
= to be windy, to breathe.
Dep. case in construction, from,
b.
11.
الله .
x= of God. See 2. b. Dep. case in construction.
= moved. 3 sg. masc. Impf. Indic. doubled verb, from
يرف
to glisten, move, brood.
رَفَفَ
رفف for
12. siji x = the face of the waters.
وَجْهِ الْمِيَاهِ
A. x; see 8. a.
b.
الْمِيَاهِ
o
107
b. s = of the waters. Def. art.; see 1. b. subst. Dep.
case in construction, broken plural, sing. g for from
abound with water.
13. LÚŤ JE, = and he said God.
J5= and he said.
وَقَالَ
a.
from J=
= to say;
قَوَلَ
الله .
لِيَكُن
=
موه
موها
= to
5 conj. J 3 sg. m. Perf. hollow verb,
changed to homogeneous with preceding fatha.
= God. See 2. b.
14. let there be. 3 sg. m. Impf. Jussive. See ¿¿ 41. 4. and
45. 10. From = to be; see 4. b.
15.= light. Subst. m. Nom. case.
16. = and there was.
فَكَانَ
نور From
a. = conj. and as indicating a sequence.
to shine, be light.
17.
گان .
and = وَرَأَى
see 4. b.
E
and he saw.
s
3 sg. m. Perf. verb doubly weak. See
8 57.3.
18. = that he (it). Separable conj. with pron. affix of 3 mı. sg.
انه
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
173
19.
حَسَن
good. Adj. m. See 2 61. F. 3.
20. Jahe separated. 3 sg. m. Perf. strong verb.
فَصَلَ
بَيْنَ
21. between. Separable preposition.
LES
22. = he called. 3 sg. m. Perf. from to seek, demand, call.
دعو
23. = day. Noun, subst. masc. Acc., alif accompanying tenween
نَهَارًا
fatha; from
SUJ =
نَهَرٍ
to flow, be clear, do anything in daylight.
24. night. Subst. sg. m. Acc.
مساء
25. gl = evening. Subst. sg. From = to tarry, tarry during
wo
evening.
26.
صَبَاحٌ
morning. Subst. sg. From
صبح
morning draught.
27. = day. Subst. sg. m. Acc. indef. From
يَوْمًا
وَاحِدًا 28.
= one. Numeral, m. Acc.
to give to drink a
يوم
= to do by day.
A
7
TRANSLITERATION OF FIRST SURA OF THE KURAN.
Bis-mil-la-hir-raḥ-ma-nir-ra-hi-mi. Al-ḥam-du lil-la-hi rab-bil-aā-la-
mī-nar-rah-ma-nir-ra-hi-mi ma-li-ki yow-mid-di-ni aiy-ya-ka naa-bu-du
wa-aiy-ya-ka nas-ta-ai-nu aih-di-nāṣ-si-rā-tal-mus-ta-kī-ma și-ra-ṭal-la-zī-
na an-aam-ta aa-lai-him ghai-ril-magh-du-bi aa-lai-him wa-lad-dal-li-na.
$
ANALYSIS FROM THE SURA ENTITLED
(For words not mentioned here see Analysis Gen. I. 1–5.)
The Formula.
In the name of God.
بِسم الله .
Prefix inseparable preposition . بسم
α.
subst. masc. Dep. case
of auf. See ? 15. 7. a.
b. xi. See Analysis Gen. 2. b.
الله.
.the = الرَّحْمَنِ الرَّحِيمِ .
2.
the compassionate, the merciful. Def. Art.
before adj's masc. sg. Dep. case from = to be merciful, compassionate.
Text.
3.
let give praise. Impf. 3 sg. masc. 2d conjugation. From
to praise, celebrate.
يسبح
سبح
مَا
4. whatever. Relative pronoun.
5. = to him. Prefix prep.; pronominal affix 3 masc. sg.
6. = the kingdom. Def. Art.; subst. sing. com. gen. Nom. case,
الْمُلْكُ
مَلَكَ from
= to possess, to reign.
7. = the praise. Def. Art.; subst. mase. sg., from =
حَمِدَ
= to
praise.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
175
8.
وَهُوَ
كُلّ
and he. Prefix insep. conj.; 3 sg. masc. pers. pro.
9. = every. Properly a subst. = whole, totality.
10. =thing. Subst. masc. sg. Dep. case, from
= to wish, will.
11.=mighty. Adj. masc. sg. Nom. case, referring back to,
= قَدَرَ from
الَّذِي
to be able, mighty.
= who. Rel. pro. See ? 32. 1,
12.
Sú
فَمِنْكُمْ
فَ
2.
13. = and from you. = and, sequential conj.; prep. ;
pronominal affix 2 masc. pl.
from=
14. ¿= an unbeliever. Verbal adj. (§ 61. F.) mase. sg., from
to conceal, deny.
15.
E
= a believer. Verbal adj. (8 61. F.) masc. sg., from hamza-
ted verb to be secure, trust, true to trust, faithful, believe.
مومن
آمِنَ
تَعْمَلُونَ
—
16. = you do.
17. quas
= beholding.
Impf. in, 2 m. pl., from ↓ = to work.
عَمِلَ
Verb. adj. m. sg., from
= to see.
18. = in the truth. Pref. prep. and def. art.; subst. m. sg. Dep.
case, from doubled verb
حق
= to be suitable, required, right, real.
19.5= and he fashioned you. Pref. conj.; perf. 3 sg. m. 2d
وَصَوَّرَكُمْ
conjugation, from = to make to incline, fashion.
فَأَحْسَنَ 2.0.
صور
and he beautified. Sequential conj.; perf. 3 sg. m. 4th
conjugation, from to be fair, good.
fromà
21. x5 = and to him. Conj. and; prep. ↓↓ = to; affix 3 sg. m.
وَإِلَيْهِ
الْمَصِيرُ 2.
=the destination.
attain to a state or condition.
إلى
Verbal noun sg. m., from
مير
=to
interrogative particle.
a أَبْ
PART III.
VOCABULARY.
a father, originally, see
ابو.
to remain, stay; lasting, ever-
lasting.
إِبْن
a son, see
بَنَى.
~ (Impf. 2) to become a father,
to nourish.
(يَأْتِي .Impf) أَتَى
E
to come, bring.
D
(Impf.) to recompense, re-
ward.
¿óƒ (Impf. 7) to mix, associate,
¿ST Adam.
آدَمُ
I particle, lo, behold, when, if;
I
[3]
then, in that case, also writ-
ten jól.
¿¿í (Impf. —) to listen, incline,
902
اذن ;permit
أَرْضَ
ear.
† (Impf. 2) to become produc-
50E
tive; earth (f.).
E
(Impf. ) to grieve, lament,
be angry.
إسم
وَحَدَ
to male one, see أحد
E
أخَوَ.
Ja brother, see
a name, see
. سمو
Áo to have root, foundation.
Á† (Impf.) to take, seize, cap- (Impf. 2) to eat.
tivate, execute.
أَخْرَ
أَخَوَ
to go back; subst. an-
آخر
.nest, آخر
other; next, last.
SE
to become a brother, orig-
907
-a sis أُخت .fem ,أخو inally
inally,
ter.
أكل
ji def. art., the.
except, particle compounded of
and I.
إِنْ
S¯† who, which, rel. pro. m.; f.
التي
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
177
†
¿Í (Impf. —) to frequent; (Impf. ÷) to strike the nose,
E
a thousand.
Ji (Impf. —) to be in pain.
¿J† (Impf. —) to serve, worship,
الله
adore; God, compounded
of def. art. If and ↓↓ God.
ĮĮ prep., to, unto.
ام
WH
-E
امر
WE
WI
xo
reach the nose, disdain, be proud,
angry.
أَهَلَ
only, but, particle.
Jøj (Impf. 2) to be peopled, in-
01
أَوَلَ
habited.
or, conj.
E
to revert, return; } first.
a mother, from to tend, di-to resort, take refuge, abide.
rect, precede.
but, interrogative, conditional,
corroborative, partitive particle.
(Impf. 2) to command, order,
multiply.
E
(Impf.) to be secure, faith-
ful, true to trust, believing.
E
verily, particle; that;
if.
I, pers. pro.
H
انت
thou, pers. pro. m.; f.
? 28.
•E
(Impf. 2) to become feminine;
.female أُنثى
E
Um (Impf. 2) to be companiona-
ble, near a human being; &lm↓
man.
I
WE
SI, to set a sign, token or mark
LOT
أَيَدَ
by which a person or thing is
E
known; and particle, that
إي
is; yes; who, which,
s
what; sign of Accusative.
to become strong.
(Perf.) to return to a
=01
.also ايضا ;thing
I
Xi, Uži (Perf. ¿Ã) to be tirea,
to rest; where; I no
آین
present time.
ງ.
now,
in, at, with, by, prep. and particle.
uts, was (Impf. wt)
بوس,
يب
و
س
to be
strong, mighty, straitened, in dis-
tress.
178
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
بحر
E
(Impf.) to cut, divide, (Impf.) to be untrue, wrong,
make wide, spacious ;
sea, great river.
S
α
† (Impf.) to begin, have pre-
♫
cedence; beginning.
Í♫ to change, exchange, substitute.
~ (Impf.) to be pious, right-
eous, beneficent, productive of
good; righteousness;
ير
1993
Í
unprofitable.
Js (Impf. 2) to be big, large,
be)
filled with food; to be lower or
F
interior; belly, abdomen.
Las
(Impf.) to remove restraint,
let alone, send.
(Impf. 2) to be distant;&
after.
Jé (Impf. 2) to become a hus-
بَعَلَ
بری
relating to the land, produced
band, a lord.
vá
by the land, wild or uncultiva (Impf. 2) to be hateful,
*
ted land, f.
. برية
I (Impf. 2) to fall, lie or kneel
down, to bless.
بَرَوَ
بزر
(Impf.) to form, cut, fashion,
shape.
(Impf. ) to throw, scatter or
sow seed.
… (Impf. 2) to spread, extend,
multiply, dilate, rejoice.
بَشَرَ
بَصُرَ
(Impf. 2) to repair the face,
surface or skin; to announce; to
come in contact, to announce glad
tidings;
بشر
mankind.
(Impf. 1) to see, become see-
ing, perceive.
odious.
(Impf. 7) to seek, desire, be
suitable, necessary.
Íé (Impf. 2) to put forth its
beard, or hair, to produce herbs
or plants; tender plants.
,to remain, continue يَبْقَى بَقِيَ
بكر
last.
(Impf. 2) to go forth in the
first part of the day, to precede,
be first-born, youthful.
(Impf.) to weep, lament.
but, on the contrary, without
exception.
¿I (Impf. 2) to reach, attain,
بَلَغَ
mature.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
179
certainly, of course, yes, particle. (Impf. 2) to leave, forsake,
$ 0
relinquish.
إبن to build, construct, form بنی
son.
تسع
m³ (Impf. =) to take a ninth;
بهج
(Impf.) to be beautiful,
goodly.
to be silent, dumb, confused;
60
.nine تسع
(Impf.) to be tired, wearied.
تَقَوَ
lamb; beast, pl. and ‚ë to fear, guard, see
بَهِيمَةً
بَهَائِمُ.
يَبُوبُ .
become a door-keeper; &G
door.
تعب
تَقَرٍ
وقي
.f., that تلك
;
تلميذ : to become a disciple تَلْبَ
a
ـذ
to
Impf and, بات Perf) بيت.
to pass (بات)
to pass the night, lodge;
a house.
(يَبِينُ Imp بان Perf) بَين. .
بين
to separate, distinguish, malce
clear; prep. between.
disciple.
~ (Impf. 7) to be complete, entire,
W
perfect.
(Impf. >) to remain, abide, at-
S
تنّين
tain full stature; a great
serpent.
83 (Perf. 3) to deviate, or miss
the right way, be lost.
(Impf.) to follow, be consec-
autive.
.prep., under, beneath تخت
$
تين
a fig tree, a fig.
‚³ (Impf. —) to be dusty, earthy;
تَرِبَ
dust, particles of earth.
(Impf.) to continue, subsist,
endure, be settled, established.
J (Impf. ) to be heavy, weighty.
180
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
¿Ã³
2)
(Impf. ) to take a third;
three ثلاث
3particle, then.
to cut;
جزع
30-
جزع
onyx.
Ju
(Impf.) to stick, adhere,
G
جسد ; assume a bodily form
ثمر
ثَمَن
تَمَانٌ
fruit.
(Impf. —) to be ripe, fruitful;
a body.
Á (Impf. =) to make to be, to
bring into existence, being.
(Impf. 2) to take an eighth;
جَلٌ
to be thick, great, majestic.
eight.
Šíš (Impf. —) to double, fold; (Impf. =) to beat the skin;
à
M >)
جَلَد جلد ; a beaten covering
إِثْنَانِ
تَوَبَ
two.
skin.
to return, return to a good
state; to make a garment,
وب
garment.
combine;
८
(Impf. =) to sit down.
(Impf. =) to collect, gather,
ميع
all.
جبر
(Impf.) to restore, be in a
state of sufficiency, be proud,
overbearing.
جَبَلَ
(Impf.) to create, create
with an adaptation, to dispose;
to make big, thick; L
mountain.
13
جن
(Impf.) to veil, conceal,
6 ໔
hide, protect; a garden
xi
(because concealing the ground
جنب
with foliage).
iş
(Impf. 2) to hit the side, be
α
$
by the side;
side.
↑
come, alight;
alight;
a wing.
ex-
て
​309
(Impf. 2) to cut off, possess a
good fortune; å, lå
ceedingly.
S⇒ (Impf. 7) to run, flow.
(Impf.) to incline, lean,
Ais to collect an army; Xiș an
army, host.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
181
Umi
جنس
to make homogeneous, to be
(Impf.) to despoil, to war.
جنس
(Impf. 2) to guard, keep;
of a kind; i genus, kind.
جَهَلَ
(Impf.) to be ignorant,
foolish.
جوب
(Impf. ) to perforate, exca-
vate, illumine, answer.
جَوَ
(Perf. 5, Impf. 3) to
be goodly, approvable, excellent;
G
W
.good جيد
(Perf., Impf.
come.
&
to
.Teeper خارش
Új (Impf. —) to be sad, sorrowful.
újó
(Impf. 2) to number, count,
calculate.
Ám
(Impf. -) to be spiteful;
A prickly plants.
Jus (Impf. 2) to be good, beau-
tiful, pleasing.
حَضَرَ
(Impf. 2) to be present, come
حَبّ
(Impf. 2) to love.
(Impf. 2) to bind, make cov-
enant, conceive.
(Impf. 2) to scrape, scrape by
حتى
little, bring to an extent;
prep., until (as denoting extent).
13
into the presence.
►
(Impf. -) to guard, protect,
keep.
(Impf. →) to be suitable, just,
right, true; right, truth;
63
Läs truly.
Jés
(Impf. 2) to prevent, hin- to sell seed-produce while yet
حَجَر
حَجَرٌ
der; 95
a stone.
G
jës
in the ear; land, field.
(Impf. 2) to be new, to come
to pass.
J (Impf.) to be vigilant, cau-
tious, to be in fear.
حَكَمَ
(Impf. 2) to prevent, restrain,
judge, rule; judgment.
(Impf. 2) to dream, conceal,
forbear.
182
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
Á (Impf. —) to praise;
خش
حمد
(Impf. —) to pick out, select,
.wood خشب : polish, trim
,to fear يَخْشَى Imp) خَشِيَ
خَضِرَ
dread, reverence.
(Impf. 2) to be green, not
mature.
(Impf. -) to be lowly, to
subdue.
(Impf.) to do a wrong,
commit a mistake, sin, crime;
خَضَعَ
لَأ
praise.
حَوطَ
(Impf. —2) to guard, defend,
surround, encompass.
ــی to يَحْيَا) (Impt) حَةٍ
ani-
S
and
;
حَيَوَان : life حَيوة : live
.serpent حية ;mals
particle, where, when.
دی
حيث
L (Impf. =) to alter, change.
(Impf. ) to draw near a
when.
حَيَن
حِينَ ; time, be at hand
خ
خَطِية
a fault, sin.
(Impf.) to remain, abide,
dwell.
(Impf. —) to keep, preserve,
conceal, hide.
álé (Impf. 2) to measure, pro-
portion, cut, create.
خَلَا
to يَخْلُو Port Impf و inform) خبر .Perf) خَلَوَ
(Impf._2_) to know, test, inform.
be empty, vacant, unoccupied.
خَبَزَ
خبز
خَجِلَ
(Impf. =) to knead, beat;
jus bread.
Íș (Impf. —) to be confounded,
ج
ashamed, unable to see the right
course.
خَرِبَ
(Impf. -) to be ruinous,
waste, uninhabited, uncultivated.
خير
(Perf.
Impf.
(يَخِيرُ
to
be possessed of gcod; to choose ;
S good.
خير
يَخِيطُ خَيَطَ
(Perf., Impf.
to sew.
(Impf. —2) to go out, proceed, (Impf.) to creep, crawl, walk
extricate, explain.
leisurely.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
183
1
Jó (Impf. 2) to enter, pass in.
S to seek, desire, ask, call.
,to pass along, pass away ذهب
ذَهَبَ
(Impf.) to befall, to contract
for a long period; time
long, or unlimited.
دَهر
exhaust, spend;
.pro., possessor ذُو
ذَوَقَ
gold.
553 (Perf. 513) to taste, per-
ceive.
ر
to) رأس
(Impf.) to hit the head, to
be head;
T head;
رانه
رَئِيسٌ
to see, consider,
chief.
E
(يَرَى Impf) رأى
obey, submit, judge; relig-
↑
دين
G
ion; yes obligation.
ذ
دين
fó dem. pro., this.
¿3 (Impf. —) to cut, divide, sac-
ذَبَحَ
rifice.
—)
¿ ³ (Impf. -) to stretch forth the
ذَرَعَ
arm;
↑
ذِرَاعٌ
fore-arm, cubit.
33 (Impf. 2) to remember, to cel-
ذَكَرَ
ذكر
ebrate; remembrance;
I's mate.
ú's that.
ذَكَر
ذلك
بَ
53 (Impf. 2) to follow on the
tail without quitting the track,
to commit a sin or crime; 335
a sin; 55 tail.
ذَنَب
ربع
Henow.
(Impf. 2) to possess, command,
rule, have lordship; to rear, fos-
ន
E
ter, guard;
lord ;
the Lord.
(Impf. ) to take a fourth;
G-E
sour. اربع
(Impf. ¯) to return, trace
back, trace, answer.
Í (Impf. —) to go on foot, make
رَجِل
رجل ; a journey
رجل
man.
foot;
رَجُلٌ
(Impf.) to have mercy, pity,
G
.mercy رحمة ; compassion
184
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
3
Jw, (Impf. -) to send; I,w,
messenger.
,to ask, question (يَسْأَلُ .Impf) سَأَلَ
رَسُولٌ
to
رَسِلَ
يَرْضَى .Impf , رَضِيَ Perf) رَضَوَ
demand.
be pleased, content, willing, ap- (Impf. 2) to cut, prepare a
مرضاة
proving; approbation.
(Impf. =) to glisten, flourish,
move, agitate, flutter.
¿(Impf. =) to raise, elevate,
exalt.
(Perf., Impf.
روح
يَروح
to
be windy, to breathe, to rest,
G
to smell;
principle.
روح
ز
G
means;
سب
w means, cause.
سبت
(Impf. 2) to rest, be quiet,
motionless.
سبح
(Impf. ) to swim, glide,
be free, free from impurity, to
praise.
(Impf.) to be a seventh, to
101
spirit, the life
be complete, perfect, full;
seven.
(Impf. 2) to be humble,
submissive, pay honor, worship.
زَبَنَ
(Impf.) to push, thrust,
contend, deceive.
زَحَفَ
walk.
(Impf. ) to creep, crawl,
ستجو
(Perf., Impf.)
to be silent, covered, dark, calm.
(Impf. —) to bruise, pound,
wear out.
زَعَقَ
(Impf. —) to call or cry out,
to be frightened, to make haste.
yu
secretly.
سر
سعو
and سَعَى
(Impf. ) to please, rejoice, tell
(Impf. 2) to assert, relate,
convey, disbelieve.
55 to couple, unite, be married.
زَوَجَ
¿j (Perf.
(Perf. ¿15, Impf.) to de-
cline, deviate, swerve, go astray.
(Impf.) to
walk vigorously, be occupied,
strive, exact.
¿é (Impf. --) to smite, burn, alter
سَفَعَ
color, make a mark, seize, strike.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
185
سَفَلَ
Jaw (Impf. 2) to descend, be low,
base.
(Impf. ) to give drink,
(يَسْقِي سَقَى
to irrigate.
JX (Impf. 2) to be still, to rest,
سکن
to dwell.
Liú (Impf. 2) to overcome, have
(Perf.
يَسِيرُ Imp, سار
to
go,` pass along easily, become
current, become.
يَسِيفُ .Imp سَافَ Perf). سَفَ
ه سیف ; to strikee with a sword
sword.
33
50-
dominion, rule; to make like, resemble, assim-
strength, power.
شَبَةَ سُلطان
به شد
A
¿w (Impf. —) to hear, listen.
Á (Impf. 2) to rise, be high;
.fish سَبَك
سمو
(Perf., Impf.) to be
high, lofty, uplifted;
g
G
ilate; likeness.
شَجَرَ
to be intricate, complicated,
a tree.
to be stingy,
شجر ; intermined
شَـ
شَحٌ
(Impf.
penurious.
(يَشُحُ
(Impf.) to be evil, wicked;
C
G
ات .heaven, pl
name.
إسم : سمو
a
شر
شَرَقَ
evil, wickedness.
(Impf. 2) to rise (of the sun)
سنو
and to irrigate, to turn
سَنَى
around a well, to turn a water-
سَنَةٌ
wheel; í a year (a revo-
lution).
يَسُودُ Impf سَادَ Perf. سَوَدَ
to
be chief, lord, master, honorable;
I w
A lord, master.
;
شرقی to give light, to cut open
eastward. .
شَكَرَ
K (Impf. 2) to thank, praise,
commend.
Z (Impf. 2) to be lofty.
Áfű (Impf. ²) to tell, inform,
give testimony.
سور
Impf.
يَسُورُ سار Per
to
,
spring, rise, ascend, wall up,
assault.
to be
.pleasant شهية ;good, pleasant
186
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
to pray, supplicate;
صَلَّى صَلَوَ
,
to excite de-
(يَشُوقُ Impt) شَوَقَ
شوق إِشْتِيَان شَـ صَلَاةٌ or صَلوةٌ .prayer صَلاة
صَنع
¿is (Impf. —) to make, manufact-
ure, construct.
sire, longing;
desire, longing.
شَوَكَ
,to oil, aish (يَا .Imp) شَيَا (يَشَاوُ
I to be thorny, to pierce.
to will, wish,
(Impf. 2) to descend, smite,
شي
desire; & a thing.
happen.
صَبَحَ
بر
(Impf.) to drink a morn-
ing draught; and
morning.
صَبَاح
(Impf.) to retain, withhold,
endure, be patient.
(Impf.) to associate, con-
sort, be a friend.
Já (Impf. 2) to return, emanate,
صوم
صور
(Impf. 2) to sound, give
voice; a voice.
صوت
(Impf.) to incline, make like,
fashion, form, picture.
(Impf.) to attain, to become.
ض
(Impf.) to cleave to the
ground, flow, creep.
strike the breast;
صِرَاطٌ
a road, way.
صَدْر
and (Impf. _2_) to ap-
breast.
pear, be morning.
és (Impf. 2) to be weak, faint,
unsound.
صَفَحَ
(Impf. 2) to be little, small.
(Impf. —) to turn towards, ó (Impf. 7) to err, go astray, be
to turn away, to forgive, to make
broad.
¿ (Impf. 2) to be good, right,
صَلَحَ
sound.
ل
|
lost.
As (Impf. —) to incline, decline,
ضَلَعَ
deviate;
ضِلَّعْ
arib.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
187
ط
ظَهَرَ
(Impf. —) to be outward, to
5 (Impf. 2) to drive away,
طَرَدَ
expel, remove.
FL (Impf. 2) to beat, knock,
طَعَمَ
travel or beat a road; &
road, way.
طَرِيقٌ
F
(Impf. —) to eat, taste; ¿éb
food.
and
طَغَوَ
(Impf.) to exceed,
be immoderate, disobedient.
¿L (Impf. 2) to rise, appear,
طَلَعَ
come forth.
طَلَوَ
طلى
and to confine, daub,
appear, to be plain, perceptible.
ع
(Impf. ) to serve, worship ;
.servant عبد ;service عِبَادَة
.Eden عدن
jáé (Impf.,¿) to pass from
عَدَوَ
and leave, to act unjustly, to be
hostile.
Các to abstain, restrain, punish,
torment.
عَرُضَ
(Impf. 2.) to be broad, spread,
90-
عرض : intervene, show the side
;
overlay.
breadth.
E (Impf. 2) to be submissive,
obedient, able.
JL (Impf. 2) to become long, ex-
tended.
عَرَفَ
(Impf. 7) to know a thing,
become acquainted with it, per-
↑
فة ;ceiving, experiencing مَعْرِفَةٌ
knowledge.
to يَطِيرُ, طَارَ, طَيَ عرق طَيْرُ : No
bird.
(Impf. 2) to strip off the flesh,
emaciate, exhaust, sweat, exude
moisture.
1
to be naked,
ظَلَمَ
(Impf. =) to do wrong, to be
bare, divested; Inf. n.
عر:
dark; darkness.
LiL
$
عُرْيَانٌ
naked.
188
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
(Impf. 7) to be mighty, power-
ful, strong, honorable, glorious;
to magnify, exalt, esteem; to
overcome, resist, oppose; Inf. n.
43
عزيز : mighty
عيز
(Impf.) to know, know cer-
tainly; Inf. n.
science.
عَلَنَ
knowledge,
علـ
عَلِنَ
;
mighty.
(Impf. 2) and dé (Impf.
—) to be open, manifest, public.
or herbage;
(Impf. —) to produce herbs
herbs, herb-
عَلَوَ
(Impf.)
İş) to be high, eleva-
age.
ted, lofty, exalted, ennobled.
jh (Impf,h) to raise or reach prep., upon, over.
forth the hand to take a thing;
على
4th form, to give, offer, present. (Impf.) to stay, prop, sup-
¿hs (Impf. 2) to be great, large,
vast.
és (Impf.) to be effaced, to
عَفَوَ
perish, come to naught; to remit,
forgive; to exceed in giving; to
exempt.
(Impf. 2) to strike the heel,
to follow close after, to succeed;
S
c heel.
Le (Impf. 2) to give to drink a
second time, to redouble, divert,
offer excuse, pretext; el may
be, perhaps.
(Impf.) to suspend, adhere,
attach, cling (as clay, clotted or
thick blood, etc).
port.
Í (Impf. —) to work, labor,
13
عن
serve, perform, construct;
work.
عَمَلٌ
(Impf.) to appear, present,
intervene; and prep. deno-
ting transition.
úc (Impf. ) to decline, turn
aside; prep. and adv. n.
úis
of place, at, near, by, beside.
Áęć (Impf. —) to enjoin, charge,
impose a condition, make com-
pact, covenant; fe injunction,
agreement, covenant.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
189
to return يَعُودُ Imp) عَادَعَوَدَ
repeat, relate, visit, betide, con-
30
عود ;fer, accustom
عيد
عُود
a return;
u festival; 3,
a small
piece of wood.
(Impf.
(Impf.) or
) - .Impt) غَمِرَ
to be abundant, copious, deep so
the bottom is concealed, to rise,
overflow, cover; Inf. n.
907
to be free of
to be
30
عمر.
(يَغْنَى .Imp) غَنِي to be يَغْنَى)
want, rich, wealthy.
to nourish يَعُولُ Imp عَالَ عَوَلَ
يَغِيبُ .Impf) غَابَ, غَيْبَ sustain a household, to become
غیب ; absent, distant, concealed
what is hidden, invisible, a mys-
tery.
,to convey يَغِيرُ .Impl غَارَ غَيْرَ
(
•
bestow; 2d form, to alter, change.
6.
poor, decline, be unfaithful.
.the form, to help, assist انعون
عَانَعَونَ
to hit نُ .Impl) عَانَ عَيَنَ
,
the eye, to smite with an evil eye,
to raise the eyes, spy ;
socket, cavity, well.
$
m.
,Imp. غبن
J (Impf.) to cheat, defraud,
deceive, overreach, damage, neg-
lect.
(I:
(يَغُرُّ Impt) غَرَّ
to deceive, beguile,
and, sequential eonjunction.
¿ï³ (Impf. —) to open, unlock,
فَتَحَ
seek, grant.
J (Impf. 7) to burn, melt, try,
test.
فَرحَ
(Impf.) to rejoice, be glad,
make to desire what is vain.
(Impf. 7) to plant, establish.
happy.
ć (Impf. —) to be angry; Inf. ¿ (Impf. 2), ¿ ³ (Impf. 2) to
غَضِبَ
n.
غَضَبٌ
فَرغَ
be empty, vacant, unoccupied, to
cease, end, finish.
Jić (Impf. 7) to cover, hide, for- (Impf. 2) to be bad, corrupt,
give, pardon.
unsound.
190
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
Jáš (Impf. =) to separate, divide,
limit.
Jés (Impf.) to do.
¿Ã³ (Impf. —) to cleave, cut, fur-
فَلَحَ
row, cultivate.
(يَفُورُ Impf) فَازَ فَوَزَ
gain, be secure, escape.
to attain,
near.
(Impf. 2) to be or become
(Impf. 7) to cut, sever, dis-
tress, traverse, recite, versify.
قسم
(Impf. 7) to divide, distrib-
ute, determine, swear.
(Impf. =) to alter, change,
F
turn, convert; heart.
قوص
3d and 6th forms, to be clear,
perspicuous.
قَلَمَ
(Impf. =) to cut, stripe;
قَلَم
F, Fs to be above, superior, to
excel.
¿ preposition, in.
jaíó, joló (Impf. orės) to
shine, be clear.
a pen.
(Impf.) to roast, beat, hate.
(Impf:) to prance, beat,
leap; 2d form, to clothe with a
shirt, i. e.,.
ق
ـل
Js (Impf. —) to receive, consent,
be in front, meet.
(Impf. 2) to kill, slay.
already, certainly.
قَدَرَ
قهر
(Impf.) to conquer, subdue,
abase, compel.
(يَقُولُ .Impf) قَالَ قَوَلَ
speak, propose.
to say,
(Impf.) to rise,
stand, be upright.
(Impf.) to measure, compute,
ك
decree, be able.
قَدُّسَ
(Impf. 2) to be far away, to
be holy.
† (Impf. —) to collect, read, re-
cite.
كبر
(Impf. 2) to be great, large,
mature.
(Impf. 2) to write, dictate,
F
prescribe; a book.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
191
كثر
(Impf. 2) to be copious, abun-
dant, numerous, to multiply.
كَذَبَ
ÇÃ(Impf. -) to lie, falsify.
(Impf. 2) to make firm, to eat
to) تحم
تحم
meat
(Impf. —) to adhere, cleave,
كَذَلِكَ
گرم
pronoun, so, thus.
(Impf. 2) to surpass, be gen-
be devoted.
لَعَنَ
لَمْ
to curse, imprecate.
particle, not.
كَفَرَ
erous, to honor, exalt.
(Impf.) to conceal, deny, be by no means, not at all.
ungrateful.
(Impf.) to thirst, burn.
(Impf. 7) to exhaust, complete,
لیس
negative subst. verb, is not.
be weary;
†
totality, all.
JJ to be night; I night.
assuredly, by all means.
(Impf. 7) to wound, speak,
converse.
lest.
(Impf. 2) to be entire, com-
plete, perfect.
يَكُونُ Imp) كَانَ كَوَنَ
(Impf.
place, be, exist.
pronoun, what.
coverings, from
to take
round, clothe, cover.
-to sur ازر
ل
J particle of affirmation; prep-
Jo, jo to grow thick, to possess.
(Impf. 2) to draw, extend,
osition, to.
Í not, no.
to) لَبِسَ
(Impf. —) to clothe;
G
س
m garment.
lis
stretch.
مراء
(Impf. 2) to be wholesome,
GE
مس
مرأة
approve; 20 a man; 81
woman.
(Impf. →) to touch, feel.
α
192
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
, مسو
مَسَا
(Impf. 2) to be even-
ing; evening.
مشی
(Impf. ~) to walk, travel.
Lo (Impf. 2) to rain, betide.
مَطَرَ
with; together.
.companion مُعينًا.
Ja (Impf.) to look at, immerge;
Lés bdellium.
E
(Impf. —) to fill, satisfy.
ú (Impf.) to possess, to rule.
preposition, from.
to be high, announce, pre-
43
,
نَبَا نَبَى
نَبِي
dict;
prophet.
to project, leave.
(Impf. 2) to appear, rise,
break forth; star.
نَجْ
sú, já, þá (Impf. 2) to call,
invite.
Í (Impf. 7) to descend, alight,
نَزَلَ
dwell.
نَسَ
(Impf. 2) to beget, bear.
(Impf.) to blow gently,
breathe, spread.
as, las (Impf. 2) to seize by
the forelock.
.pronoun, toho من
مَنْ
S, (Impf. 2) to die;
.death موت
8% (Impf. ) to abound in water;
موه
S
Eto, što water.
نَظَرَ
(Impf. 4) to look upon, con-
sider, expect;
نظیر
similar, like.
(Impf.) to be soft, comfort-
able, pleasant;
yes; the
-
kindness, grace.
C
نَفَحَ
to blow, breathe.
F
mé to breathe; me soul.
نفس
(Impf. 2) to germinate, grow, (Impf.) to sell, lose, dispose,
é
produce plants.
exhaust.
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
193
,Imp to pour rain, beat) وبل .river هر to flow abundantly نهر
chase.
نَهَرَ
Impt - to forbid, be) نَهَا نَهَى
final, complete, bring to an end. (Impf.) to find.
to ache, suffer
,
وَجَدَ
(Impf. 2) to shine, light
وجع
(يوجع)
اور
نَارَ نَور
up, enlighten; light.
نُور
ર
S
~ (Impf. —) to sleep ;
a sleep.
୪
(Impf.
pain.
x>5 (Impf. xș) to strike the face;
وَجَة
وَحَشَ
face.
5 to be in contempt, grow sav-
هب
(Impf.) to blow, rouse, awake.
Sú (Impf.) to lead, guide.
láé pronoun, this.
Mé (Impf.) to ruin, destroy.
.interrogative pronoun هَلْ
age, brute-like; beast.
وَحش
¿55 (Impf. ¿№) to put down, leave,
وَدَعَ
forsake.
555 (Impf. 3) to get leaves,
branch out; 55 leaf.
وَرَقْ
Jis there.
he.
هُوَذَا
هي
15 behold!
she.
,
5 conjunc. and, particle of swearing.
وَاحِدٌ
numeral, one.
(يَسطُ .Impf) وَسَطَ
to be in the
middle, midst.
وَصَى
(Impf.) to unite, will,
command.
(Impf.
(يَضَعُ Impt) وَضَعَ
to put, place,
abate.
وَقَتَ
وَقَعَ
to fix a time; time.
ت
to fall down or upon.
194
AN ARABIC MANUAL.
(Impf.) to guard from
fear, preserve, arrange.
وَكَل
(يَلِدُ .Impt) وَلَدَ
to trust, rely.
to beget;
وَلَى
child, boy.
وَلَدْ
to be close, to turn back or
away.
Y:
يبس
ww (Impf.) to dry up, be
dry.
to be made an orphans.
& hand.
100
to be day;
day.
يوم
يوم

Coninte
[!!!
: tདྷྭ༣:2
std
&

wils
UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA
492.7 L291
Lansing, John Gulian.
An Arabic manual,
3 1951 001 551 864 D
WILSON
ANNEX
AISLE 37
0123456
0123456
0123456
QUAWN
4
2
3
1
QUAWN--
EXTAWN-I

654321
A4 Page 8543210
AIIM SCANNER TEST CHART #2
4 PT
6 PT
8 PT
Spectra
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",/?$0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:”,./?$0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:',./?$0123456789
10 PT ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
Times Roman
4 PT
6 PT
8 PT
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:'../?$0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
10 PT ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
4 PT
6 PT
8 PT
Century Schoolbook Bold
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
10 PT ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
4 PT
6 PT
News Gothic Bold Reversed
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:'',/?$0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:',./?$0123456789
8 PT ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
10 PT ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
4 PT
6 PT
8 PT
Bodoni Italic
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?80123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
10 PT ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789
ΑΒΓΔΕΞΘΗΙΚΛΜΝΟΠΡΣΤΥΩΝΨΖαβγδεξθηικλμνοπορστνωχ ζ=7",/St=#°><ΕΞ
Greek and Math Symbols
4 PT
6 PT
8 PT
ΑΒΓΔΕΞΘΗΙΚΛΜΝΟΠΦΡΣΤΥΩΧΨΖαβγδεξθηικλμνοπφροτυωχψί=7",/S+=#°><><><=
ΑΒΓΔΕΞΘΗΙΚΛΜΝΟΠΦΡΣΤΥΩΧ Ζαβγδεξθηικλμνοπόρστυωχψίπτ",./St##°><><><Ξ
10 ΡΤ ΑΒΓΔΕΞΘΗΙΚΛΜΝΟΠΦΡΣΤΥΩΧΨΖαβγδεξθηικλμνοπορστνωχ ίΞτ",/St=#°><><=
White
MESH HALFTONE WEDGES
I
|
65
85
100
110
133
150
Black
Isolated Characters
e
3
1
2
3
a
4
5
6
7
о
8
9
0
h
B
O5¬♡NTC
65432
A4 Page 6543210
A4 Page 6543210
©B4MN-C
65432
MEMORIAL DRIVE, ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14623
RIT ALPHANUMERIC RESOLUTION TEST OBJECT, RT-1-71
0123460
மய
6 E38
5 582
4 283
3 32E
10:
5326
7E28
8B3E
032E ▸
1253
223E
3 3EB
4 E25
5 523
6 2E5
17
分
​155自​杂
​14 E2 S
1323S
12E25
11ES2
10523
5836
835E
7832
0723
SBE 9
OEZE
1328
2 E32
3 235
4 538
5 EBS
6 EB
15853
TYWES
16 ELE
14532
13823
12ES2
11285
1053B
SBE6
8235
7523
◄ 2350
5 SER
10 EBS
8532
9538
7863
ROCHESTER INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY, ONE LOMB
PRODUCED BY GRAPHIC ARTS RESEARCH CENTER